JP7456088B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding slot machines, when the start lever is operated while medals are being bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is carried out, the reels begin to rotate, and the reels stop while they are rotating. When the switch is operated, the reels stop rotating. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the internal lottery result, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention
a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
an accepting means for accepting gaming media or virtual gaming media;
a bet number setting means for setting a bet number for a game;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a granting means capable of granting a predetermined number of gaming media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery result by the lottery means includes a first result in which a prize can be won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and a first result in which the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. a second result that makes it possible to win a prize;
comprising mode notification execution means capable of executing mode notification regarding operation modes including the first operation mode and the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means;
A special state is set that allows transition to a specific state in which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification execution means,
In the special state, comprising means capable of making a specific determination of transitioning to the specific state,
The states in the special state, which are different from the specific state, include a first state in which the result of the specific determination is more likely to result in a result corresponding to transition to the specific state; a second state in which the result of the determination is unlikely to result in a result corresponding to the transition to the specific state;
a first means capable of terminating the specific state and the special state when a first terminating condition is met;
a second means capable of terminating the specific state while preventing the special state from terminating when a second terminating condition is met;
means that can be set as the first state in the next special state when the specific state is terminated by the first means;
means capable of setting a state after the specific state as the second state when the specific state is terminated by the second means;
Equipped with
The present invention is characterized in that the special state is not terminated in the first state .

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state when 3 bets are made. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state when 2 bets are made. It is a flow chart showing reel control processing. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. It is a figure showing an example of a lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows advantageous area transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT consecutive shots. It is a figure showing an example of various migration lottery tables. It is a figure showing an example of a stock lottery table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure for explaining the outline of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a press order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section. It is a flowchart which shows the press order notification process. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the number of games management process. It is a flow chart which shows section display first processing. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows MY update processing. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of an advantageous section and the display of the section display. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for payout adjustment. It is a figure showing an example of a consecutive home state table. It is a flowchart which shows AT type determination processing. It is a figure showing an example of an AT type table. 3 is a flowchart showing ceiling counter setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a ceiling mode table. It is a diagram showing how the ball output is adjusted in accordance with the progress of the game. It is a diagram showing how the ball output is adjusted in accordance with the progress of the game. (a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of forced termination performed by the display control device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special effect table. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a consecutive home state table in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a consecutive win status table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for ball output adjustment in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for ball output adjustment in modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for ball output adjustment in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows AT type determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing ceiling counter setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a state transition notification process performed by a display control device in a second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the information for consecutive games status performed by a main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for memory retention. It is a flow chart which shows AT lottery processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the number table of portent games. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result handling process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows advantageous area transition lottery processing. 3 is a flowchart showing ceiling counter setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of process for ball output adjustment in 6th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 closed, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 open, Fig. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Fig. 5 is a front view of a cabinet 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 500-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include the "Bell" symbol (for example, the 1st on the left reel 32L), the "Replay" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L), the "Red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th on the left reel 32L), “Watermelon” symbol (e.g. 2nd on left reel 32L), “Cherry” symbol (e.g. 8th on left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (e.g. 9th on left reel 32L), “White 7” symbol (for example, the 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L), "Red Shell" symbol (for example, the 4th on the left reel 32L), "White Shell" symbol (for example, the left There are 10 types (19th on reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are reported using combinations of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, a combination of these three symbols is, for example, by tying the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIG. The combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1, the combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R, the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the bending line L6 is a line that bends in the middle when the symbols are lined up. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line other than the bending line L6, but their explanation will be omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated by medal bets are set, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line, When winning a prize, a bonus is given in which a predetermined number of medals as game media are paid out, or a bonus is given in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no prize is won and the above benefits are not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6 mentioned above, the bending line L6 is set as the valid line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, there are cases where the game is started after three medals are bet, and cases where the game is started when two medals are bet. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines. In the following description, the bending line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In addition, below, a game that starts with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game that starts with two medals bet is called a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with one medal bet is called a 2-bet game. The game is also called a 1-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a 1-bet game is not set.

Figures 8 to 10 show the correspondence between winning combinations of symbols and the benefits that will be awarded if a winning combination is achieved.

The small winnings for which medals are paid out include small winnings 1 to 32.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a small winning combination of 1 is awarded. When a small win of 1 is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbol corresponding to the small win 1 appears on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols appear on the downward sloping line L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a small winning combination of 2 is awarded. When a small winning combination of 2 is established, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 2 are stopped on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small role winning corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, a small role winning that is different from the above-mentioned small role 1 winning is possible. It is also possible to understand that this is true.

If the “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol or “red shell” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a small role 3 is awarded. It will be a prize. When 3 small winnings are achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 3 are stopped on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols are all stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and it is different from the above-mentioned small winning combination 1 and small winning combination 2 due to the difference in the line in which the "bell" symbol is aligned. It is also possible to understand that small role winnings have been achieved.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a small prize of 4 is obtained. When 4 small winnings are achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 4 are stopped on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upward-rightward line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and it is different from the small winning combination 1 to 3 mentioned above due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned. It is also possible to understand that small role winnings have been achieved.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a small winning combination of 5 will be awarded. When a small winning combination of 5 is established, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 5 are stopped on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and it is different from the small winning combination 1 to 4 mentioned above due to the difference in the lines in which the "bell" symbols are aligned. It is also possible to understand that small role winnings have been achieved.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a minor win of 6 is won. When a minor win of 6 is won, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 6 stop on the active line ML, "bell" symbols appear in the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R. Stop (stop in a hill shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and it is different from the small winning combination 1 to 5 mentioned above due to the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol. It is also possible to understand that small role winnings have been achieved.

The “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, “cherry” symbol, “red shell” symbol, or “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “white 7” symbol, “white shell” on the right reel 32R When the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the active line ML, a small winning combination of 7 is awarded. When a small winning combination of 7 is established, three medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 7 are stopped on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are all stopped on the downward-sloping line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small win corresponding to the watermelon has been won.

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a small prize of 8 is obtained. When a small winning combination of 8 is established, three medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 8 stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols all stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small prize winning corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved, and due to the difference in the lines in which the "watermelon" symbol is aligned, a small prize winning that is different from the above-mentioned small prize winning 7 is possible. It is also possible to understand that this is true.

Minor wins 9 to 32 are so-called missed wins, in which winnings are mainly achieved when minor wins 1 to 6 are missed. When a minor winning combination of 9 to 32 is established, one medal is paid out in a 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in a 2-bet game. Small roles 9 to 32 are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, or "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L. , "White 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, "Cherry" symbol, "Aka shell" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "Replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Bell" The symbol or "white shell" symbol and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "red shell" symbol, and "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R Or, a winning is achieved when the corresponding combination of the "replay" symbol and stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, in all of the combinations of symbols corresponding to these winnings of 9 small winnings to 32 winning small winnings, the "bell" symbols are aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5) and do not stop. It is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been achieved.

Incidentally, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the winnings of the small winnings 1 to 32, the small winnings that are paid out are a type of privilege that is given according to the result of the game. In addition, in this specification, the medals that are paid out may also be referred to as balls put out, and the ratio of the number of medals paid out (balls put out) to the number of medals inserted (bet) is also referred to as the ball payout rate. There are cases.

Prizes for which a replay benefit that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals include the 1st replay win to the 12th replay win. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of these first to twelfth regames.

In the first replay, the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "White Shell" symbol, or "Young Man" symbol on the right reel 32R, ” When the symbol stops on the active line ML, a winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the active line ML, the "replay" symbols are all stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a replay winning corresponding to the replay has been achieved.

In the second replay, the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. A prize will be awarded. When the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "BAR" symbols are aligned and stop on the upward-rightward line L5, as shown in FIG. 14(a), or as shown in FIG. 14(b). , the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward-rightward line L5. When the second re-gaming win is established, although the gaming state does not shift, a shift to a notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and a first AT state as a so-called pseudo bonus starts.

In the third replay, the "bell" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line ML. If it stops at the top, a prize is awarded. When the symbols corresponding to the 3rd re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stop on the lower line L3, as shown in FIG. 14(c), or as shown in FIG. 14(d). As shown, the "Red 7" symbols line up and stop on the downward-sloping line L4. When the third re-gaming win is established, although the gaming state does not change, a transition to a notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and a second AT state as a so-called pseudo bonus starts.

The fourth re-game and the fifth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games overlap and win.

The 6th replay consists of a "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, a "Red 7" symbol, a "White 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R. A winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol, stops on the activated line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the upper row of the middle reel 32M, while the The "Watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper row of the reel 32R (the "Watermelon" symbol stops at the lower row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called upper row watermelon tenpai-off state. Also, when the symbol corresponding to the 6th re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the lower row of the right reel 32R, while the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M. ” The symbol does not stop (the “Watermelon” symbol stops at the upper row of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called right-down downward watermelon-tempai stop mode.

The 7th replay is a "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "white 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, an "aka shell" symbol, or a "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. Or, when the "red shell" symbol stops on the active line ML, a winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the upper row of the right reel 32R, while the The "Watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "Watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called upper stage Watermelon Tenpai-missing stopping mode. Also, when the symbol corresponding to the 7th re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, while the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the lower row of the right reel 32R. ” The symbol does not stop (the “Watermelon” symbol stops at the top of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called right-down-down-watermelon-tempai stop mode.

The 8th replay consists of a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "white 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, an "aka shell" symbol, or a "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. A winning is established when and stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols all stop on the middle line L2.

In the 9th replay, when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. A prize will be awarded. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th replay win stops on the active line ML, the "replay" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, while the right The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called middle stage replay out-of-temperature stopping mode.

In the 10th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R A winning is established when the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "youth" symbol stops on the activated line ML. Also, in the 12th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. If the robot stops on the line ML, a prize is won. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game winning or the 12th re-gaming winning stops on the active line ML, a "cherry" symbol appears in the lower row of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you win in the 10th replay or 12th replay, if you perform the stop operation aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, if you win in the 10th replay, the "cherry" symbol will stop on the upper row. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, so it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-gaming winning and the 12th re-gaming winning. In the 11th re-game, a prize is established when it is not possible to win a prize in the 10th re-game or the 12th re-game, that is, when there is a possibility that the winnings may be missed.

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include a 1st BB winning and a 2nd BB winning.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first BB prize is won. When the first BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning are stopped on the active line ML, the "white 7" symbols are all stopped on the middle line L2.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a 2nd BB prize is awarded. When the second BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning stops on the active line ML, the "White 7" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to a main control device 101, which will be described later. The main controller 101 then recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output LOW detection signals, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 recognizes the switching of the signals and recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reels corresponding to the operated switches to stop rotating.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotary plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48, and pays out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored above the height of the guide plate 52a, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, there is a first credit input switch 56 for inputting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as game media out of the prescribed number of coins for the game at a time. is provided. The specific number of coins is set depending on the progress of the game. For example, if the first credit input switch 56 is operated when the prescribed number of medals for the game is set as 3 and the specific number is set as 3, then 3 virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. If the first credit input switch 56 is operated when the prescribed number of credits is set to 2 and the specific number is set to 2, the 2 credits will be inserted on condition that there are credits. When virtual medals are inserted and the specified number of medals is set as 3 or 2, and the specific number of medals is set as 3, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, If three virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, and the specified number is set as 3 or 2, and the specific number is set as 2, then the first When the credit input switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. Further, a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting two virtual medals. Each credit input switch 56, 57 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. It should also be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 and 57 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media. Note that this slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because one virtual medal is inserted.

The first credit insertion switch 56 is set to have a larger operating surface for operation by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, it is expected that normally the player will operate the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, normally the player will insert a specific number of coins out of the specified number to play the game.

To the right of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, a performance switch 66 is provided which is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the remaining number of medals that will be paid out before the BB state ends. A display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are constructed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is a press order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a press order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. An instruction monitor 68 is provided with a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of the small winning combination is changed by the above, and the game can be played in an advantageous situation for the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

In the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and a predetermined display screen. There is. Note that the lower display section 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display section, the lower display section 69 may be provided with operation buttons for presentation, or the entire lower display section 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

The main control device 101 is provided with a winning ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio of gaming states that are advantageous to the player and those that are not. The role ratio monitor 77 is controlled by the main controller so that it becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is open, and becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is closed. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine, and more specifically, it is installed in the board box so that the display surface of the winning ratio monitor 77 can be viewed through the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is accommodated. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be seen through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21. It is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77 unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be explained in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, various sensors are connected, such as the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that detects when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

Furthermore, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply cut-off state and generates a power failure signal not only during a power failure but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off and output a power failure signal when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example. The power failure signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes the power failure processing described below. The power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

The output side of the main control device 101 is connected via an input/output port 104 to the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid out display unit 61, the number of coins to be paid out display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the role ratio monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing the game status, a status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured so that a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b is inputted when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181, which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. It has built-in RAM 183 to secure the memory.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), and the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-platform that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages the games. That is, by providing a sub-board for audio, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main board is reduced.

A production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like are connected to the input side of the display control device 81. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be explained.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage, etc., a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes starting from step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor, which is the respective drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to transmit various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, and payout number display section 62, respectively. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 18.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, a pre-start process is performed to enable play. In the pre-start process, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have finished initializing. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has finished, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S213.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any re-game winnings were achieved in the previous game. If any re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, if a re-play winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-play winning is achieved in a 2-bet game, two virtual medals are automatically inserted. Performs processing to automatically insert virtual medals.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if any re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If any re-gaming winnings have not been achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do.

After the end of the medal return process or when the payment switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 and 57 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Further, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medal bets has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in gaming states other than the bonus state. In other words, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". An affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been bet, or if a bet has been made but the number of bets is "1", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to step S204 to wait for the start, and processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. Set as the output target. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that a game start condition has been met, notification of a lottery result in a previous game), and outputs a notification to the speaker 64. and controls the auxiliary display section 65.

After executing the process in step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S204 to wait for the start, and processes subsequent to the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, only the bending line L6 is set as a valid line. In step S209, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211, the medal payout process in step S212, and the bonus status process in step S213 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 19.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining whether the winning combination is correct or not. In this slot machine 10, the gaming states are roughly divided into a normal gaming state and a bonus state, and the lottery table is set for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, so the lottery table for the normal gaming state is the same as the lottery table for the 3-bet game. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is also set up.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the gaming state flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is determined. Select. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and no bonus state flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state Select a lottery table. If the current game is a 3-bet game, select the normal game state lottery table for 3-bet games (Figure 20), and if the current game is a 2-bet game, select the 2-bet game. Select the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 21). In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the process related to setting the probability of winning.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is started after the initialization process when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated as a predetermined operation, and for example, the setting value is updated so that "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → "setting 4" → "setting 5" → "setting 6" → "setting 1" each time the start lever 41 is operated once. Note that each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 with the setting key detection sensor 73a turned OFF is regarded as a setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 is also terminated. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table selection process is performed based on the stored setting value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 shows a normal game state lottery table selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 21 shows a normal game state lottery table that is selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65,535, in step S306, a process is executed to set the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 to the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the small winning combination 7 winning flag and the small winning winning 8 winning flag are set in step S306. Further, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB was won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB was winning (second BB winning flag), the winning flag is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In addition, in step S306 when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a combination other than the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the first BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the small winning 1 winning flag, the small winning 9 winning flag, the small winning 10 winning flag and set the small win 13 winning flag.

In addition, a lottery table with the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag carried over is prepared separately, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 27.3 for setting 1, approximately 1 in 27.5 for setting 3, and approximately 1 in 28.3 for setting 6. It is set so that the higher the price, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both independent of the setting value. It is approximately 1/26.2. The probability of winning on chance A (probability of winning when IV = 4) is approximately 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning on chance B (probability of winning when IV = 5) is approximately 1/164, regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning is approximately 1/262 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning on chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is approximately 16400 minutes regardless of the setting value. 1, and it is set so that chance B is more likely to win than chance C, and chance A is easier to win than chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV=7) is approximately 1/107 for setting 1, approximately 1/104 for setting 3, and approximately 93.6 for setting 6. It is set so that the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is approximately 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9) is approximately 1/215. The probability of winning) is approximately 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and it is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is approximately 1/504 regardless of the setting value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle order push bell 1, middle order push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning Pincer Bell 2, Reverse Push Bell 1, and Reverse Push Bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is the set value. It is approximately 1/18.4 regardless of the difference. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is approximately 1/107 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is approximately 1/5.03 regardless of the setting value, and other winnings (replay, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card hand (IV=24) and the 2nd BB (IV=26) cannot be won (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In a 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the first BB is 0. In a situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is approximately 1/5.03 (for the first BB), regardless of the setting value. By the way, in a 3-bet game, before winning the 1st BB, you can expect a decrease of about 1.50 medals per game (net increase minus about 1.50 medals), excluding the increase in the 1st BB state. In the carryover state after winning the 1st BB, you can expect a decrease of about 2.10 medals per game, excluding the increase in the 1st BB state (net increase of medals minus about 2.10 medals).

On the other hand, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, and Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1 to 9) are as follows when playing the above 3 bet game. The probability is the same as the probability if The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1/9.64 regardless of the setting value, making it easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so that they cannot be won in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 257 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that it is more difficult to win than when playing a 3-bet game. has been done. In the 2-bet game, settings are made so that a duplicate 1-card hand (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is approximately 1/1.81 regardless of the setting value. In addition, in the 2-bet game, it is set so that the first BB (IV=25) cannot be won, but it is set so that the second BB (IV=26) can be won, and the probability of winning is regardless of the setting value. It is approximately 1/4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the second BB is 0. In a situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the second BB), regardless of the setting value. By the way, in a 2-bet game, before winning the 2nd BB, excluding the increase in the 2nd BB, you can expect a decrease of about 0.24 medals per game (net increase of medals minus about 0.24 medals), In the carryover state after winning, excluding the increase in the second BB state, you can expect a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game (net increase of medals minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect in which the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are invalidated for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether to shift the gaming state or not depending on the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the above lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no commands are transmitted to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, when the push order bell 1 is won (won when IV = 11) and the small role 1 winning flag, small role 9 winning flag, small role 10 winning flag, and small role 13 winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the small role 1, small role 9, small role 10, and small role 13 winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, when the watermelon is won (won when IV = 23) and the small role 7 winning flag and small role 8 winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the small role 7 and small role 8 winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that a winning can be achieved only in a 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that a winning can be achieved only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1st BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the 1st BB winning is set. is not performed (stop symbol information is set to avoid the first BB winning). In addition, even if the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 3 bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning is set. is not performed (stop symbol information is set to avoid the second BB winning).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor role, replay, and bonus roles have been won, the following priorities are set. If a small role win and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the small role win takes priority and the bonus win is established when the small role win cannot be achieved. . When winning a re-game and a bonus, the priority order is set so that the re-game winning is established with priority.

For example, in a situation where the 1st BB has been won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning has been carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1st BB is won, the small prize 7 and the small prize are When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8 winnings is set, the priority order is set so that the small winning combinations 7 and 8 winnings are established with priority over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in a situation where you have won the 2nd BB (a situation where the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning has been carried over), you can also win the regular reply A, win the 2nd BB, and win the 1st replay. , if the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd re-gaming, 3rd re-gaming, and 4th re-gaming winnings is set, each re-gaming winning is given priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set the ranking.

Here, when a re-game is won, a winning combination of symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will definitely win. In other words, if the player wins in the replay, the replay win will definitely be achieved, and there will be no loss of winnings. Therefore, when stop symbol information for re-games and bonuses is set, a re-game win is always achieved in any of the set re-games, and a bonus win is never achieved.

After executing the process of step S313, the first section display process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process is terminated. The first section display process is a process related to the display control of the indication monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and this process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 22.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation performance process is a process for performing a performance using reel control during the invalid period based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In the following step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and then ends the rotation start process. Furthermore, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Notify players, etc.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. do. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to make it understand which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If they are equal, reel stop processing to stop the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=11 to 22, that is, when a bell is won in the order of pressing (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 that generates the stop command A second stop information setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations in steps 44 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. For example, if the middle order push bell 1 is won, each of the stop switches 42 to 44 will change from left to middle to right, left to right to middle, middle to right to left, right to left to middle, or right to right. The stop information is set so that when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, a small win of 17, 18 or 21 is achieved, and when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. sets the stop information so that the small win 3 prize is established. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly explained. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, if the same type of symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol will be activated when it becomes a winning symbol regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by five or more symbols, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to stop the symbols on the active line.

As an example, we will explain a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped to achieve the small win 17, small win 18, or small win 21.

The 17 small winning symbols on the left reel 32L are the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. Furthermore, the 18 small winning symbols on the left reel 32L are a "red shell" symbol and a "white shell" symbol. The small winning combination 21 symbols on the left reel 32L are a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the left reel 32L, these 17 small winning symbols, 18 small winning symbols, and 21 small winning symbols are arranged such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any of the small winning combination 17 symbols, small winning combination 18 symbols, and small winning combination 21 symbols will stop on the active line (middle row) regardless of the operating timing. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing when they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop the symbol with a small number of sliding pieces on the active line. That is, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, the fourth "Akakai" symbol (2 frames Bell), which is the 18 small winning symbol, is operated. ), and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 frames beri), which is a small role 21 symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, but the 4th "Akakai" symbol, which has the smallest number of sliding panels, stops in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed as follows. In this case, although there is still room for winning a small role of 18, winning a small role of 17 and winning a small role of 21 will not occur.

When the small winning combination 18 symbols on the left reel 32L stop in the middle row, the stop information is changed in the second stop information setting process so that the small winning combination 18 winning can be realized.

The 18 small winning symbols on the middle reel 32M are "replay" symbols. On the left reel 32L, "Replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "Replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops at the upper row of the middle reel 32M.

The 18 small winning symbols on the right reel 32R are the "white shellfish" symbol and the "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the "Shirakai" symbol or "Young man" symbol, which is the 18 small winning symbols, can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. . If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, a small win of 18 will be won, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, it will be a so-called missed win. Become.

Here, when the "red shell" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops in the top of the middle reel 32M, it can mean that middle push bell 1 is won, resulting in a small win 18, as described above, or that middle push bell 2 is won, resulting in a small win 20. In other words, the small win 20 symbol in middle push bell 2 is the same as the small win 18 symbol on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M. And on the right reel 32R, while the small win 18 symbols are the "white shell" and "young man" symbols, the small win 20 symbols are different, being the "red 7" and "white 7" symbols. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the small win 18 symbol and the small win 20 symbol are arranged so that if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the small win 18 symbol can be stopped on a valid line, the small win 20 symbol cannot be stopped on a valid line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the small win 20 symbol can be stopped on a valid line, the small win 18 symbol cannot be stopped on a valid line. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle push bell 1 or the middle push bell 2 has been won, even if the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped in a stopping state that may result in the small win 18 and the small win 20, it is not possible to aim for them and win.

Next, an example will be explained in which the middle order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is controlled to stop in order to achieve the small winning combination 3 prize.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are three small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are 3 small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between "Bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops at the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red shell" symbol, which are three small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between these symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated thirdly, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the timing of the operation. As shown above, if the middle order push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the small win 3 prize will be established regardless of the timing of the operation. .

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, a small role 1 prize, a small role 2 prize, a minor role If 3 wins, 4 wins in small roles, 5 wins in minor roles, or 6 wins in minor roles are achieved, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operations, depending on the timing of the operations, will a small role win be achieved? , none of the small roles were won and they were left out. By the way, if you win a common bell, you will receive 1 small prize, 2 small prizes, 3 small prizes, 4 small prizes, 5 small prizes, or 6 small prizes regardless of the operation order and timing. A prize is won.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result corresponding process, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the winning result, etc. is performed. The winning result corresponding process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the winning result corresponding process, a second section display process is executed in step S415. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S416, a winning result command is set to cause the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is ended.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the first to twelfth re-game wins has been achieved based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If any replay winnings have not been achieved, the medal payout process is immediately terminated, and if any replay winnings have been achieved, a replay setting process is performed to set the gaming mode to replay mode. , ends the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) explained earlier, when it is determined that the current gaming mode is the re-gaming mode, automatic input processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 is subtracted. .

Next, the bonus state processing in step S213 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 24. Note that the bonus state processing is activated at the end of one game in the normal processing, and if the activation timing of the bonus state arrives in a situation that is not the end timing of the game, the bonus state is not activated and is activated in the normal processing. Move on to the next process.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is a first BB state or a second BB state. Whether the state is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag, which are set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. Identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and one of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state process is immediately terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process advances to step S503.

In step S503, processing is performed to input 3 into the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The MAX bet counter is used to set a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit input switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are input. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of coins for the game, in a situation where the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to 2 or 3, operating the second credit input switch 57 It is permissible to play a 2-bet game. Note that if 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether a first BB win or a second BB win has occurred. If neither of the BB wins has occurred, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB wins has occurred, the process proceeds to step S505, where it is determined whether a first BB win has occurred.

If the first BB winning is established, in step S506, a process is executed to input "46" into the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The BB counter is a counter for defining the upper limit number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "46" into the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB status flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination will be made in step S501. In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the first BB state is started, and the display control device 81 that has received the first BB start command recognizes that the first BB state is started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the first BB start effect is performed. In addition, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can recognize that the next game will be in the first BB state, and the display control device 81 can use the speaker 64 or the like to perform the production for the first BB state from the next game. Controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, a process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is played in a 3-bet game.

Note that the initial values of the prescribed bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3, and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB winning has not been achieved is the case where the second BB winning has been achieved. In this case, the process advances to step S511, and a process of inputting "2" into the BB counter described above is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when two or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. Thereafter, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game, The speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. are controlled so that the presentation for the 2BB state is performed. Note that the first BB start performance and the second BB start performance are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can identify them. Furthermore, the appearance and content of the first BB state performance and the second BB state performance are different to the extent that the player can distinguish them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, a process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. That is, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is played in a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515, and processing in the first BB state or the second BB state is performed. FIG. 25 shows an example of a BB state lottery table. Note that in this embodiment, a common lottery table is used in the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables are provided for each, and the types of winning roles and the probability of winning for each role are different. It's okay. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, settings are made so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate 1-card combination can be won in the first BB state and the second BB state. The probability of winning a normal reply A (probability of winning when IV=1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/61.2. The probability of winning a duplicate one-card combination (the probability of winning when IV=24) is approximately 1/9.02. Furthermore, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of a losing result in which neither winning combination is won is approximately 1/3.13. In this case, a decrease of about 0.96 medals can be expected per game (net increase of medals minus about 0.96 medals).

Here, in the normal playing state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is caused by winning small winnings 1 to 6, where 13 coins are paid out. The winning combination is the push order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor prizes, in the normal gaming state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a fixed order, the probability of winning a prize is about 1 in 9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is approximately 1/9.03, and in a 3-bet game, the setting is such that winning is more likely to occur in the first BB state than in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the normal gaming state in a 2-bet game and the 2nd BB state that can be transitioned to in a 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and in the normal gaming state, the probability is about 1/9.64 In contrast, in the 2nd BB state, the probability of winning is approximately 1/9.03, and even in 2-bet games, winnings are more likely to occur in the 2nd BB state than in the normal gaming state. It is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the first BB state and the second BB state, a lottery table is used in which medals may decrease in each game, so even if the first BB state or the second BB state is completed, an increase in the number of medals held cannot be expected. Conversely, it is expected that the number of medals held will decrease as the first BB state or the second BB state is completed.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any of the small winning combinations has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process using the BB state lottery table and each reel control. If a winning has not been achieved, the bonus state processing is immediately terminated. If a winning is established, a process is executed in step S516 to subtract the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, in the second BB state, if a common bell is won and minor winnings 1 to 6 are achieved, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter, and the BB counter becomes 0 or less. .

If it is determined in step S517 that the number is not less than 0, the bonus state processing is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is 0 or less, in step S518, a process is performed to clear the BB status flag corresponding to the current BB status. That is, if it is in the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is in the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 into the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to be ended this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, when terminating the first BB state, the first BB end command is set to be output, and when the second BB state is ended, the second BB end command is set to be output. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

Thereafter, in step S521, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3, and then the present bonus state processing is ended. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal gaming state after the first BB state or the second BB state ends. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are input, and the 2-bet game The game will be held at In other words, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the setting is such that the 2-bet game is likely to be played. By the way, after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so you cannot bet 3 by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57, In order to play a bet game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal slot 45.

Here, the gameplay using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game in the present slot machine 10 will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. 26.

In the initial state where the RAM 106 has been initialized (cleared), the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set, and the game is in a normal gaming state (non-internal state) in which no BB has been won. be. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, if 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, it becomes a 2 bet game.

In the non-internal state, in a 3-bet game, you can win the first BB but not the second BB, and in a 2-bet game, you can win the second BB but not the first BB. In a game in which the first credit input switch 56 is operated as described above, the second BB can basically be won in a two-bet game.

If the first BB or the second BB is won and the winning game is not successful, a carryover state (internal state) occurs in which the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over. Also in the internal state, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, if 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, it becomes a 3 bet game.

As already explained, in this slot machine 10, in the internal state where the 1st BB is won, the 1st BB winning can be achieved in a 3-bet game, but each reel is set so that the 1st BB winning cannot be achieved in a 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state where the 2nd BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the 2nd BB winning cannot be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the 2nd BB winning can be achieved in a 2-bet game. It will be done. In other words, if you win the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if you continue playing the 3-bet game, you can win the 1st BB, but if you switch to the 2-bet game after winning the 1BB, you can win the 1st BB. cannot be established. Also, if you win the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if you continue playing the 2-bet game, you can win the 2nd BB, but if you switch to the 3-bet game after winning the 2nd BB, you can win the 2nd BB. cannot be established. Then, the 1st BB and the 2nd BB will not be won twice, and the 1st BB will not be won again in a situation where the 1st BB winning has been carried over, and the 2nd BB will not be won twice. Also, in a situation where the 2nd BB winning has been carried over, you will not be able to win the 2nd BB again, and you will not be able to win the 1st BB twice. In other words, if you play the 2-bet game when you win the 1st BB, you will continue playing in the internal state where the 1st BB win is carried over, and if you win the 2nd BB, you will play the 3-bet game. Then, the game continues endlessly in the internal state in which the second BB win is carried over.

Here, as mentioned above, since the 1st BB winning is made to occur only in 3-bet games, and the 2nd BB winning is made to be made only in 2-bet games, the 3rd BB winning in a situation where the 2nd BB winning is carried over Even if you end up with a losing result in which you do not win any role in a bet game, the 2nd BB won will not be established, and if you end up losing in a 2 bet game where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even if it is, the 1st BB prize will not be established. By doing this, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the winning structure and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the internal state where the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that a 2nd BB win can be achieved in a 3-bet game, or a 1st BB win can be achieved in a 2-bet game, the internal state that carries over the 1st BB win or 2nd BB win If you want to continue winning, it will be necessary to create a lottery table that will not result in a losing result, and for example, in a winning combination that may be missed, it will be necessary to win another winning combination when the winning result is missed.

Furthermore, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main winning combination that increases medals is the common bell. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the main role that increases medals in a 2-bet game is the common bell, whereas the main role that increases medals in a 3-bet game is the push order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the small winning combinations 1 to 6 can be won regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, whereas the winning order for the pressing order bells is as follows: The winning small winning combinations differ depending on the operating order and operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. In other words, the amplitude of medal increase/decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won is greater in the non-internal state and internal state in a 3-bet game than in the 1st BB state and 2nd BB state. is big. For example, when the push order bell is won, the operation order (Fig. 25) that will result in winnings from Small Win 1 to Small Win 6 will be announced, so that the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists in winning and the automatic mode that does not. By switching between the non-AT mode (non-navi mode), it is also possible to create a state in which the number of medals increases and a state in which the number of medals decreases depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

In a game in which the first credit input switch 56 is operated, a 2-bet game is first played in the non-internal state, and the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. When the second BB is won, an internal state is established, and in the game in which the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state in which the winning second BB cannot be established. In this case, as mentioned above, in a 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, there is no winning in the 1st BB, and there is no winning in the 2nd BB. The game will continue in this state.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB winning flag is stored in the normal area in the various flag storage area 106d, whereas the second BB winning flag is stored in the storage area in the various flag storage area 106d. The normal area is an area in which various general flags such as winning flags for other roles are stored. Even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (the power is turned off), the flags stored in the normal area are stored and maintained by backup power or the like. Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the game hall closes, if the power is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 is started with the various flags stored in the normal area stored, and even if the power is turned on/off with the first BB winning flag set, the slot machine 10 is started with the first BB winning flag set. However, when the winning probability setting process is started when the slot machine 10 is started (when the setting is changed), the normal area is initialized (cleared). Therefore, when the process for setting the winning probability is performed, the 1st BB winning flag is cleared along with the other flags stored in these normal areas.

On the other hand, the storage area is an area where only the second BB winning flag is stored. Similar to the normal area described above, the flag stored in the storage area is not cleared by turning the power ON/OFF. Furthermore, in the storage area, even if the winning probability setting process is activated when the slot machine 10 is started up, the storage area is not initialized (it is not subject to initialization processing). ). Therefore, even if the winning probability setting process is performed, the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area is not cleared but is held (saved). In other words, if the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of 1st BB winning where the 1st BB winning flag is stored, the 1st BB winning flag is cleared and activated as a non-internal state. If the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of 2nd BB winning in which the 2nd BB winning flag is stored, the 2nd BB winning flag is not cleared and the system is activated in the internal state of 2nd BB winning. Ru. By doing so, the game in the internal state in which the second BB winning is carried over can be continued not only when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on/off but also when the settings are changed.

In that case, in order to play in an internal state in which the second BB win is carried over, essentially, it is sufficient to play until the second BB win occurs in the two-bet game as it is when the slot machine 10 is shipped from the factory, and thereafter, that second BB win will be stored and held until the reset switch 72 is operated and the RAM clear process is performed. In this way, it is possible to preferably play in a state in which the second BB win is carried over.

Hereinafter, assuming that the game is played with the 2nd BB winning carried over, we will explain the gameplay using the notification when the push order bell is won (press order notification), etc. in that game (in the following explanation, also referred to as the normal game). explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 27. The lottery result handling process is a process that is performed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery to shift to the AT mode in which press order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

More specifically, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this slot machine 10, regarding the occurrence or non-occurrence of push order notifications, advantageous zones in which push order notifications may occur, and normal zones in which they may not occur, are set. The advantageous zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the current game is in an advantageous zone, and is set when a transition to an advantageous zone occurs, and is cleared when a transition to a normal zone occurs.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section, and in this case, an advantageous section transfer lottery process is executed in step S602, and then the lottery result corresponding process is ended.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, an advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 31, in the advantageous section transfer lottery table, the transfer rate to the advantageous section (probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 31, the triggers for the lottery to move to the advantageous section are normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all possible winning results are set as triggers for the lottery to move to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for advantageous section transition lottery, dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used, and the dedicated counters are updated at a predetermined period, and in step S703, the latest updated value of the counters is acquired. Then, in step S704, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that no matter which trigger is used, there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section shift lottery. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step S701 is the trigger for the transfer lottery (not a losing result), it is also possible to omit the processing of steps S702 to S705.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, a process of setting the advantageous section flag described above is executed in step S706. This process makes it possible to make an affirmative determination in step S601 of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27) for the next game and subsequent games. In the subsequent step S707, processing is executed to set an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section has been won in the current game.

In the following step S708, AT ceiling setting processing is executed. As described above, in this embodiment, an AT mode is provided that assists with the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the push order bell is won. A ceiling value is set. The ceiling value is a value that determines the transition to AT mode by playing a set number of games, and in this embodiment, the maximum value of the ceiling value is set to 999. In other words, by playing 999 games after winning the advantageous section shift lottery, the shift to the AT mode will definitely occur. In step S708, the initial ceiling table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and the counter for lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e, and the initial ceiling value at the time of winning the advantageous section transition is determined by lottery. A process of inputting the initial ceiling value into the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. In the initial ceiling table, for example, one of the values from 1 to 30 is selected with a probability of about 1/10, and a value from 101 to 200 is selected with a probability of about 2/10. , one of the values from 301 to 400 will be selected with a probability of about 3/10, and other values will be selected at random for the rest. Note that the initial ceiling table may be set to be different depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. The ceiling counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games up to the ceiling for causing a transition to the AT mode, and is subtracted by 1 each time one game is played in the advantageous section.

In the subsequent step S709, processing is executed to input 100 as a predetermined number into the advantageous section continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The advantageous section continuation counter indicates that in the advantageous section, the player is not in AT mode, has not won the AT mode transition lottery, is not in CZ mode, where the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is high, and is not in CZ mode. This is a counter for measuring the number of games played in a situation (normally advantageous section) in which no one has won the mode transition lottery (normally advantageous section), and the advantageous section continuation counter is decremented by 1 for each game in the normal advantageous section. Then, when the advantageous section continuation counter becomes 0, the advantageous section ends and transitions to the normal section. That is, after winning the advantageous section transition lottery, when the number of games in which no AT mode or CZ mode is won reaches a predetermined number, the advantageous section ends and the game shifts to the normal section. Therefore, the advantageous section may end before the ceiling counter input in the previous step S708 becomes 0. Note that the predetermined number input in step S709 is a value smaller than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500). If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after executing the process in step S709, the advantageous section transition lottery process is ended.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S601 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process advances to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the AT mode flag is a flag that is set when shifting to the AT mode. That is, in step S603, it is determined whether the situation is such that the transition to the AT mode has already been determined or the transition has already been completed. If none of the flags is set in step S603 and the transition to AT mode has not yet been determined, AT lottery processing is executed in step S604. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S603, AT consecutive hits processing is executed in step S605.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S802, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode are provided as states in the advantageous section and before winning the AT mode lottery, and the CZ mode is a mode in which it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal mode. is set as . The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to determine whether the current mode is the normal mode or the CZ mode, and is set when transitioning to the CZ mode. If it is determined in step S802 that the CZ mode flag is not set, a normal AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 in step S803. If it is determined in step S802 that the CZ mode flag is set, a CZ AT mode transition lottery table is acquired in step S804.

In these AT mode transition lottery tables, as shown in FIG. 31, the probability of transition to AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination). For example, in the AT mode transition lottery table for normal mode, chance B is more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than chance A, and chance C is even more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than chance B. In general, the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) as a game lottery result, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. In addition, regarding normal reply A and cherry A, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, and the setting value that is set to have a higher ball payout rate ( The higher the set value is), the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. Comparing the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, even if the lottery results are the same, it is set up so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ than for normal use. For example, the AT mode winning rate for chance A in the CZ mode is twice the AT mode winning rate for chance A in the normal mode. In this embodiment, regarding the AT mode transition lottery, it is set so that the transition lottery is not performed for the common bell and the pressed order bell.

It should be noted that the AT mode transition lottery may be performed even with these common bells and push order bells, and the game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery are not limited to those described above. For example, the superiority of the CZ mode may be ensured by having different types of game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery between the normal mode and the CZ mode; in this case, the type of game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery It is preferable that there are more types of results in the CZ mode. Furthermore, in this case, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery itself may be the same in the normal mode and the CZ mode. There are multiple CZ modes, and each CZ mode is different, such as in one CZ mode, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery on chance, and in other CZ modes, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery on cherry. An AT mode transition lottery table may be set.

In step S805, an AT mode transition lottery is executed using the lottery result of the current game grasped in step S801 and the AT mode transition lottery table acquired in step S803 or step S804. Note that in the AT mode transition lottery, random numbers for lottery are obtained from various counter areas 106e, and the lottery is performed using the random numbers, as in the advantageous section transition lottery. The configuration for such a lottery is the same for other lotteries described below, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In step S806, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery is won, in step S807 the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e are cleared to 0, and then the AT mode winning flag is set in step S808. Execute the processing to be performed. As described above, the initial ceiling value is input to the ceiling counter when the lottery for moving to an advantageous section is won. In other words, if you win the AT mode shift lottery after moving to the advantageous section, it will be assumed that you have reached the ceiling before the number of games entered in the initial ceiling value is played, and the shift to AT mode will occur. become.

Thereafter, in step S809, a precursor flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and a precursor command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After that, the present AT lottery processing is ended.

Here, in this embodiment, when a situation where a transition to AT mode is likely to occur, a precursor mode is set that indicates the situation. More specifically, as mentioned above, a ceiling counter is set that allows transition to AT mode when it reaches 0, and in precursor mode, the ceiling counter must reach 0 before it reaches 0. A suggestive effect suggesting that the vehicle is approaching is performed on the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, etc. Then, when the ceiling counter becomes 0, transition to the AT mode is permitted, and a notification effect to that effect (AT mode winning notification effect) is performed. The portent mode is set to shift to when the value of the ceiling counter becomes less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 32), and the portent flag indicates that the CPU 102 knows that the portent flag is set to the portent mode. The precursor command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the precursor mode is set. The precursor command includes information on the number of games remaining until the ceiling counter reaches 0 in the precursor mode, that is, information on the number of games in the precursor mode.

Incidentally, when the portent flag is set in step S809 to shift to the portent mode, the ceiling counter is 0, so the number of games in the portent mode in this case is 0. That is, in this case, the AT mode winning notification effect indicating that the transition to the AT mode is permitted is performed without going through various suggestion effects in the precursor mode.

If it is determined in step S806 that the AT mode transition lottery was not won, the process advances to step S810. In step S810, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, a CZ mode transition lottery is performed in step S811. In the CZ mode transition lottery, a CZ mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 31) is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and a counter for lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ mode. A lottery will be held. In addition, in this embodiment, Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Chance Eye C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, and Watermelon are set as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery, but other than these A lottery may be held based on the winning combination, and the probability of winning is not limited to that shown in FIG. 31.

Then, in step S812, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, the CZ mode flag is set in step S813, and the CZ counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is set. A predetermined value of 10 is input to , and the CZ start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 . By setting the CZ mode flag, an affirmative determination is made in the above step S802, and it becomes possible to receive an AT mode transition lottery using an advantageous lottery table. Further, the CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the CZ mode, and is subtracted by 1 each time one game is played in the CZ mode. Then, when the CZ counter becomes 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared and the CZ mode ends. The CZ start command is a command to make the display control device 81 understand that the CZ mode will start, and the display control device 81 that has received the CZ start command will assist so that the effect for starting the CZ mode will be performed. The display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled, and in each game in the CZ mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a CZ mode performance is performed.

If the CZ mode flag is set in step S810, if the CZ mode transition lottery is not won in step S812, or after executing the process in step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. move on. In step S814, a ceiling counter subtraction process is executed. Then, in step S815, it is determined whether the ceiling counter has become 0 as a result of the subtraction process in step S814. If the ceiling counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S808 and a process of setting an AT mode winning flag is executed. Thereafter, after passing through the process of step S809, the AT lottery process ends.

If it is determined in step S815 that the ceiling counter is not 0, it is determined in step S816 whether or not the ceiling counter is 32 or less, which is the number of games that triggers the transition to the portent mode. If the number is 32 or less, it is determined in step S817 whether a pseudo precursor flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, although the same or similar suggestion effect as in the precursor mode occurs, the effect mode ends without the AT mode winning notification effect indicating that the shift to AT mode is finally allowed. A pseudo omen mode (a mode in which so-called false effects occur) is set, and the pseudo omen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that this mode is the pseudo omen mode. If the pseudo omen flag is not set, it is determined in step S818 whether or not the omen flag is set, and if the omen flag has already been set, the main AT lottery process is immediately terminated. . If it is determined in step S818 that the precursor flag is not set, a process is executed in step S819 to input the current ceiling counter value into the precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S820, a precursor flag is set, and a precursor command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After that, the AT lottery processing is ended. The precursor counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the precursor mode. As described above, the harbinger command includes information on the number of remaining games up to the ceiling, that is, the number of remaining games in the harbinger mode, and the display control device 81 controls the suggestion effect according to the number of remaining games in the harbinger mode. We will hold a random lottery.

The case where the pseudo omen flag is set in step S817 is the case where the ceiling counter becomes 32 or less during the pseudo omen mode. In this case, the process advances to step S821, where the pseudo-harbinger flag is cleared, and a pseudo-harbinger counter for determining the remaining number of games in the pseudo-harbinger mode is cleared to 0, and then the process advances to step S819. In this case, the precursor mode is set following the pseudo precursor mode.

If it is determined in step S816 that the ceiling counter is not 32 or less, the process advances to step S822, and it is determined whether or not a pseudo precursor flag is set. If the pseudo omen flag is set, the main AT lottery process is immediately terminated. If the pseudo omen flag is not set, processing for setting the pseudo omen mode is executed in steps S823 to S825. That is, in step S823, whether or not to set the pseudo-harbinger mode and, if set, the number of games in the pseudo-harbinger mode are determined by lottery. Regarding such a lottery, for example, the harder it is to win as a game lottery result (low appearance rate), the easier it is to win the transition lottery to pseudo-harbinger mode; ) If the result is a winning lottery for switching to the pseudo omen mode, a pseudo omen mode with a relatively long number of games may be set. Then, in step S824, a process of inputting the number of games in the pseudo-harbinger mode determined in step S823 to the pseudo-harbinger counter is executed. Note that if the lottery for transition to the pseudo omen mode is not won, the process of step S823 is not performed (0 is input to the pseudo omen counter). Thereafter, in step S824, a pseudo omen flag is set, and a process for setting a pseudo omen command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the AT lottery process is ended. The pseudo-harbinger command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to understand that the pseudo-harbinger mode is set, and includes information on the number of games remaining in the pseudo-harbinger mode, and the display control device 81 allows the display control device 81 to recognize that the pseudo-harbinger mode is set. Depending on the number of remaining games, a lottery will be held to generate a suggestion effect. Note that if the lottery for shifting to the pseudo-harbinger mode is not won in step S823, it is preferable to end the AT lottery process without performing the process in step S825.

<Processing for AT continuous use>
Next, the AT consecutive play processing executed in step S605 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30. As already explained, the AT consecutive game process is a process that is executed when the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set, and it is a process that is executed when the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set. This is a process for adding (stocking) etc.

That is, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S902, a process of acquiring a stock lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed, and in step S903, a stock lottery process is executed. As shown in FIG. 32, the stock lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the set number addition (stock) lottery differs depending on the current situation and the game lottery result. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery and the AT mode winning flag is set, but the situation before the notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery is made (before the AT mode winning notification), and the situation where the winning notification is Comparing the situation after the winning announcement and before the transition to AT mode (after the winning announcement and before the transition), even though the trigger for the stock lottery is the same, the situation after the winning announcement and before the transition is better. It is set so that it is easier to win the stock lottery than before the AT mode winning notification. In addition, in this embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are set as AT modes in which the number of consecutive games in one set is different, and the number of consecutive games in the second AT mode is longer than that in the first AT mode. is set to . Comparing the stock lottery in the first AT mode and the stock lottery in the second AT mode, the setting is such that it is easier to win the stock lottery in the second AT mode.

After the stock lottery is performed in step S903, it is determined in step S904 whether or not the stock lottery has been won. If it is a non-win, the process for AT consecutive games is immediately terminated, and if it is a win, a process of adding 1 to the stock counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S905. , this AT consecutive play processing ends. The stock counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining sets in AT mode.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27).

After executing the process of step S604 or step S605, it is determined in step S606 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a winning combination. The push order combination is a result that includes normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C in addition to the press order bell. Normal Rip A, Normal Rip B, and Normal Rip C are all results of multiple replays resulting in winnings, and the replays that result in a winning may vary depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. It is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the normal reply A is basically set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32M, etc. 32R stop control is performed. On the other hand, in the normal reply B and the normal reply C, each reel 32L, 32M, When the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the first replay winning is achieved. . However, in these normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C, no matter which replay prize is achieved among the replays that have been won twice, the privilege granted is a replay, and the replay won is The only difference is the type of game. In other words, normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C are game results in which a re-game winning is achieved regardless of the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop result differs depending on the order of operation. In particular, normal reply B and normal reply C are triggers for starting the AT mode, and the first AT mode starts in a game where the AT mode winning flag is set and the second replay winning can be achieved. The second AT mode is started in a game in which the AT mode winning flag is set and a third replay prize can be achieved.

If it is determined in step S606 that the winning combination has been pressed, it is determined in step S607 whether the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set. If any of the flags is set, the push order notification process is executed in step S608, and then the lottery result handling process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S606 or step S607, the lottery result handling process is immediately terminated.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to explaining the press order notification process executed in step S608, an overview of the press order notification executed on the instruction monitor 68 and the press order notification effect executed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be explained. Note that the press order notification and press order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, press order navigation, order notification, or mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 notifies you of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs a pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 34(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode and the display content of the instruction monitor 68.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling on/off of these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Note that since all of the above-mentioned individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each of the display segments N1 to N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" to "6". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right part of the area in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can at least display "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as it is possible to individually display multiple patterns of symbols on the instruction monitor 68, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 may be arbitrary, and it is even possible to display seven segments instead of eight segments. It is also possible to use a configuration using 1 segment, 9 segments, or the like. Furthermore, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and the configuration may be such that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the configuration in which each display segment N1 to N8 is turned on or off by controlling the light source on and off is not essential, but if display control can be performed individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be configured with a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of the pressing combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 34(b), by performing the stop operations in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be achieved. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and "1" is displayed. Furthermore, if the winning mode is advantageous to the player by performing the stop operations in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit to display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed in each display segment N1 to N7 have a one-to-one correspondence with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit in the game in which the start condition is met, when a predetermined start condition is met, including a notification condition that creates a situation in which a push order notification can occur, such as a transition to a favorable zone, an AT mode winning notification being made, and an AT mode flag being set. It is also turned off when the AT mode ends and there is a transition from the favorable zone to the normal zone.

In other words, the section in which it is easier for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by being more easily notified of the order of operations such as the push order bell, etc. is defined as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is as follows: In the advantageous section, the light will turn on during a specific section where you can actually benefit from push order notification, and it will turn off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or a non-specific section that is an advantageous section but is not a specific section. This serves as a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as a press order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, displays the number of payout pieces on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display section 62. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. operated by the player, or in other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. are provided on the front surface of the gaming machine. is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hands operating the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is placed in a position that is easily visible to the player. Also, since it is placed near the payout number display section 62, which is easy to watch for players who are playing the game with the aim of acquiring medals, it can be said that the chances of players overlooking it are suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display parts (for example, the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice that of the surrounding display section. Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display sections are both controlled to emit light (lighted up), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance of the eighth display segment N8 toward the front of the gaming machine is higher than that of the surrounding display sections (more specifically, the illuminance of the eighth display segment N8 is higher than that of the surrounding display sections). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is twice as high. Such a configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents it from being overlooked when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state.

Next, the push order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be explained by taking as an example a case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the middle stop The number 1 is added to the middle button (corresponding to the switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display section 65, a number is displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is displayed and the number 3 is displayed on the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the timing of the push order notification, it is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts, through the acceleration period, until the reels reach constant speed rotation. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, it is possible for the player to recognize the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then operate the stop switches 42 to 44 as desired, allowing the game to progress at a good tempo.

<Press order notification process>
Next, the press order notification process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag is set. The case where the AT mode winning flag is set means that the transition to AT mode has not yet occurred after the AT mode winning. In this case, in step S1002, it is determined whether the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT notification flag and the second AT notification flag are set based on the fact that after winning the AT mode transition lottery, it becomes possible to transition to AT mode through the omen mode, and an AT mode winning notification effect is performed. It's a flag. If the AT mode winning flag is set but these AT notification flags are not set, it means that the AT mode transition lottery has been won but the player is still in the precursor mode. In this case, in this game, the press order notification is not generated, and the process for press order notification is ended. If the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set, the process advances to step S1003.

In step S1003, it is determined whether the lottery result of this game is normal lip B or normal lip C. If it is not normal lip B or normal lip C, but normal lip A or push order bell, the main push order notification process ends. If it is either normal lip B or normal lip C, it is determined in step S1004 whether it is normal lip B. If it is normal lip B, it is determined in step S1005 whether the above-mentioned first AT notification flag is set. If the second AT notification flag is set instead of the first AT notification flag, the main push order notification process ends. If normal lip B is won and the first AT notification flag is set, proceed to step S1006 and execute the process to start the first AT mode.

That is, in step S1006, the first AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1007, a flag for starting the first AT is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the first AT mode will be started from the current game. Thereafter, in step S1008, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the press order notification corresponding to the second re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1009, after executing a process of setting a press order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the second replay winning as an output target to the display control device 81, a process for notifying the main press order is executed. end. The display control device 81 that has received this press order command displays a press order notification effect corresponding to the second re-game winning, such as a press order notification effect of the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, or a message saying ``Aim from the right!''. !'', voice navigation, etc. are displayed, and the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning is announced.

If it is determined in step S1004 that it is normal reply C rather than normal reply B, the process advances to step S1010. In step S1010, it is determined whether the second AT notification flag is set. If the first AT notification flag is set instead of the second AT notification flag, the main press order notification process is immediately terminated. If the normal reply C is won and the second AT notification flag is set, the process advances to step S1011, and processing for starting the second AT mode is executed.

That is, in step S1011, the second AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1012, a second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the second AT mode will be started from the current game. Thereafter, in step S1013, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the press order notification corresponding to the third re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1014, after executing a process of setting a press order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning as an output target to the display control device 81, a process for notifying the main press order is executed. end. The display control device 81 that has received this press order command displays a press order notification effect corresponding to the third re-game winning, such as a press order notification effect of the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, and a press order notification effect of ``Aim from the right!''. !'', voice navigation, etc. are displayed, and the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the symbol corresponding to the third re-game winning is announced.

The case where it is determined in step S1001 that the AT mode winning flag is not set means that a shift to the AT mode has already occurred, and in this case, the process advances to step S1015. In step S1015, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is the push order bell. If it is not the pressing order bell, the pressing order notification process is immediately terminated. If it is a push order bell, in step S1016, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that push order notification corresponding to small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 6 winning is performed according to the type of the current pressing order bell. Then, in step S1017, after executing the process of setting the press order command including the information of the operation order corresponding to the small win 1 win to the small win 6 win as an output target to the display control device 81, the main push The forward notification process ends. The display control device 81 that has received this press order command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the press order notification effect corresponding to the small win 1 win to the small win 6 win is performed.

<Winning result processing>
Next, the winning result handling process carried out in step S414 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting or ending the AT mode or the like is performed depending on the game result.

First, in step S1101, game number management processing is performed. In the game number management process, a process for managing the number of CZ mode games and the number of portent mode games is performed.

More specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, in step S1201, it is determined whether the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and if it is in either BB state, the game continues. Ends the number management process. That is, if a transition to the second BB state occurs in a 2-bet game, the number of games in the portent mode or CZ mode is not managed. If it is not in any BB state, the process advances to step S1202, and it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, a process of decrementing the CZ counter by 1 is executed in step S1203. Then, in step S1204, it is determined whether the CZ counter has reached 0. If it has become 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S1205, and a CZ mode end command is sent to the display control device 81. Execute the process to set as output target. Clearing the CZ mode flag ends the CZ mode and shifts to the normal mode. In addition, the display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode end command displays the auxiliary display section 65 so that notification that the CZ mode has ended (for example, text display such as "That's a shame" and its sound effect) is displayed. and the speaker 64.

If a negative determination is made in either step S1202 or step S1204, or after executing the process in step S1205, the process advances to step S1206. In step S1206, it is determined whether the omen flag or the pseudo omen flag is set. If none of the flags is set, the game number management process is immediately terminated. If any of the flags is set, the process advances to step S1207, and a process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter or pseudo precursor counter is executed. That is, in step S1207, if the mode is the sign mode, the sign counter is decremented by 1, and if the mode is the pseudo sign mode, the pseudo sign counter is decremented by 1.

After executing the process in step S1207, it is determined in step S1208 whether the precursor flag has been set and the precursor counter has reached 0. That is, when the number of portent games becomes 0 in the portent mode, the process advances to step S1209, and processing for clearing the portent flag is performed. Then, in step S1210, AT type determination processing is performed to determine whether the current AT mode type is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. Such processing will be explained in detail later.

In step S1211, it is determined whether the first AT mode has been determined as the processing result of step S1210. If the first AT mode is determined, in step S1212, a first AT notification flag is set, a first AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and a number of games management process is executed. finish. By setting the first AT notification flag, processing for generating press order notification for the second re-game winning is performed in the above-described press order notification process. In addition, in the display control device 81 that received the first AT winning notification command, in addition to winning the AT mode shift lottery and being allowed to shift to AT mode, the current AT mode is the first AT mode. As a notification of a certain event, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a first AT winning notification effect is performed. In the first AT winning notification performance, for example, "REG BONUS!!" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 64.

If it is determined in step S1211 that the AT mode to be shifted to this time is not the first AT mode but the second AT mode, in step S1213, the notification flag for the second AT is set, and the second AT winning notification command is sent to the display control device. 81 is executed, and the number of games management process is ended. By setting the second AT notification flag, processing for generating press order notification for the third re-game winning is performed in the above-described press order notification process. In addition, in the display control device 81 that received the second AT winning notification command, in addition to winning the AT mode shift lottery and being allowed to shift to AT mode, the current AT mode is the second AT mode. As a notification of a certain event, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a second AT winning notification effect is performed. In the second AT winning notification performance, for example, "BIG BONUS!!" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 64.

In step S1208, if the premonition counter is not 0, or is 0 but the pseudo premonition flag is set instead of the premonition flag, the process proceeds to step S1214. In step S1214, it is determined whether the pseudo premonition counter is 0 and the pseudo premonition flag is set. If a positive determination is made in step S1214, a process is executed in step S1215 to clear the pseudo premonition flag, and then the number of games management process is terminated. This ends the pseudo premonition mode. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215 and the pseudo premonition counter is not 0, or is 0 but the premonition flag is set instead of the pseudo premonition flag, the number of games management process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process, after the game number management process is executed in step S1101, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the first AT start flag is set. As mentioned above, the 1st AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game that allows the 2nd replay winnings when the transition to the 1st AT mode occurs.More specifically, the 1st AT notification flag This is a flag that is set at the start of a game in which the normal reply B is won in the set situation. That is, the first AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. If the first AT start flag is set, the first AT start flag is cleared in step S1103, and 100 is set in the AT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e in step S1104. Execute. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the remaining number of medals to be paid out in the AT mode, and when medals are paid out in each game in the AT mode, a number corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is subtracted. That is, the first AT mode is an AT mode that ends when 100 or more medals are paid out.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the first AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S1105 whether the second AT start flag is set. As described above, the second AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game in which the third replay winning is possible when a transition to the second AT mode occurs, and more specifically, it is a flag that is set at the start of a game in which the normal lip C is won in a situation in which the second AT notification flag is set. In other words, the second AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. If the second AT start flag is set, the second AT start flag is cleared in step S1106, and the AT counter is set to 200 in step S1107. In other words, the second AT mode is an AT mode that ends when 200 or more medals are paid out, and is an AT mode in which more medals can be expected to be won than in the first AT mode.

After executing the process of step S1104 or step S1107, the process advances to step S1108, and a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step S1109, an AT mode flag is set, and in step S1110, a process of setting an AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that an AT start effect is performed according to the type of AT mode to be started.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the second AT start flag is not set, the process advances to step S1111. In step S1111, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set and the AT mode is in progress. If it is not in the AT mode, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated. If the AT mode is in effect, in step S1112, a process of subtracting the number of medals paid out from the AT counter is executed based on the game result of the current game. For example, if 1 small win is established and 13 medals are paid out, a process of subtracting 13 from the AT counter is performed. Further, if the game result of the current game is any replay winning or losing result, no medal payout will occur, and therefore, the AT counter subtraction process is not executed.

In step S1113, it is determined whether the AT counter has become 0 or less based on the processing result of step S1112. If it is larger than 0, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated. In this case, the AT mode will continue. If the AT counter is less than or equal to 0, a process to clear the AT mode flag is executed in step S1114. This ends the AT mode.

Thereafter, in step S1115, ceiling counter setting processing is executed. This process will be described in detail later, but in step S1115, the ceiling counter is reset upon termination of the AT mode. Thereafter, in step S1116, processing is executed to set the AT end command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the winning result corresponding processing is ended.

<Management of number of games and differential number of cards in advantageous section>
Next, a first section display process and a second section display process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section display and managing the number of games and the difference number of sheets in an advantageous section will be explained. .

<Section display first process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. The first section display process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the lottery result. This is carried out after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where it is a specific section of the advantageous section in which at least a notification condition that can generate press order notification is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1301 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the process advances to step S1302.

In step S1302, it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process (Figure 28). If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone winning game flag is set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that it is the winning game. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, in step S1304, a process is executed to clear the advantageous zone winning game flag. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set in step S1303, proceed to step S1305.

In step S1305, it is determined whether the counting of the number of games in the advantageous section, more specifically, the measurement of the number of games AG in the advantageous section in the various counter areas 106e has started. If the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not been started, processing for starting the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed in step S1306. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of games played in the advantageous section, and a process of adding 1 for each game in the advantageous section is executed.

If it is determined in step S1305 that measurement has already started, or after executing the process in step S1306, the process advances to step S1307. In step S1307, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set. As already explained, when the AT mode winning notification performance is performed and the AT mode flag is set, a state is created in which press order notification can be generated when the press order winning combination is won, and the conditions for starting notification of the section display are satisfied. I will do it. If it is determined in step S1307 that the AT mode flag is set, then in step S1308, the section indicator starts displaying by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, in the main control device 101, when the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned on and the display is started, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A sound output command is output to the display control device 81 so that a sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Note that when the eighth display segment N8 starts displaying, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is generated on the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. In this case, a corresponding command is output to the display control device 81, and It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that the display control device 81 performs a corresponding effect.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, then in step S1309 a process is executed to continue displaying the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1309, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. That is, the process for terminating the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display process.

In the case where it is determined that the advantageous section flag is not set in step S1302, in the case where it is a winning game even if the advantageous section flag is set (after executing the process in step S1304), and in the case where the winning game is If the situation is not one in which press order notification can occur even if this is not the case (if it is determined in step S1307 that the AT mode flag is not set), the process advances to step S1310. In step S1310, a process of adding 1 to a first hand ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The first hand ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Further, after executing the display start process of the section indicator in step S1308 and after executing the display continuation process in step S1309, the process advances to step S1311. In step S1311, a process of adding 1 to a second hand ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The second hand ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1310 or step S1311, a winning ratio calculation process is executed in step S1312. In this process, the value of the second hand ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first hand ratio counter and the second hand ratio counter. That is, the hand ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which press order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1313, processing is executed to display the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1312 on the winning ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the hand ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as 7-segment display sections. There is. The display segments in the first display section 77a to fifth display section 77e, like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, have individual light sources made of LEDs, and these individual light sources can be controlled to turn on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 is configured to individually display predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display 5-digit numbers. There is.

In step S1313, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1312 is output to the winning ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e on the winning ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the winning ratio monitor 77. Perform display control. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to 4 decimal places, such as "0.5012". The numbers are displayed on the winning ratio monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1313, the first section display process ends.

Note that the display control of the winning ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit after the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1312. In addition, since the first display section 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display section 77a may not be provided, or the first display section 77a may be printed, etc. The configuration may be such that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that a decimal point is displayed by printing or the like between the first display section 77a and the second display section 77b.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S415 of the reel control process, and upon the end of one game, the payout of medals (payout determination process) and the transition of the gaming state based on the winning result are performed. etc. (winning result corresponding processing) is carried out.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If it has not been set, the second section display process ends. If the advantageous section flag is set, in step S1402, processing for counting the number of games during the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of advantageous zone games AG is performed. After executing the process in step S1402, in step S1403, a process is executed to update the number of increase/decrease tickets MY (MY counter) in advantageous sections provided in various counter areas 106e.

In the MY update process in step S1403, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, in step S1501, it is determined whether the game result of the current game is any replay winning. If it is a re-game win, the MY update process is ended without updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY. If it is not any re-game winning, the process advances to step S1502.

In step S1502, a process of subtracting the number of coins inserted (number of bets) from the number of coins paid out is executed based on the game result of the current game. Step S1502 is a process for determining the increase in the number of medals or the decrease in the number of medals by subtracting the medals used in the game and the medals acquired. For example, in a 3-bet game, when 1 small win is achieved, 3 medals are bet and 13 medals are paid out, resulting in an increase of 10 medals. Furthermore, when a small winning combination of 9 is achieved in a 3-bet game, 3 medals are bet and 1 medal payout occurs, resulting in a decrease of 2 medals. If none of the small roles are won in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are bet and 0 medals are paid out (because no medals are paid out), so 3 medals are subtracted. A decline is occurring.

In the next step S1503, the calculation result of step S1502 is added to the number of medals increased or decreased in the favorable zone MY. For example, if the calculation result of step S1502 is that an increase of 10 medals has occurred, a process of adding 10 to the number of medals increased or decreased in the favorable zone MY is executed, and if the calculation result of step S1502 is that a decrease of 2 medals has occurred, a process of subtracting 2 from the number of medals increased or decreased in the favorable zone MY is executed. Then, in step S1504, it is determined whether the number of medals increased or decreased in the favorable zone MY is 0 or more, and if it is 0 or more and an increase in medals has occurred in the favorable zone, the MY update process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1504, if the number of medals increased or decreased in the favorable zone MY is less than 0 and no increase in medals has occurred in the favorable zone but a decrease in medals has occurred, a process of clearing the number of medals increased or decreased in the favorable zone MY to 0 is executed, and then the MY update process is terminated.

In the second section display process, after the MY update process in step S1403 is executed, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1404, and the remaining game number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1405. The remaining number of games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) with the current number of remaining games, based on the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1450 at the start of the second AT mode, even if the AT mode is continued as it is, the end condition of the AT mode (number of payout coins = 200) First, determine whether the situation is such that the maximum number of games in the advantageous section will be reached. If such a situation exists, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number of coins management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 coins) with the current number of remaining games, based on the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. It is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, when starting the second AT mode, the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is 2300. Also, it is determined whether the situation is such that the upper limit increase in the number of advantageous sections will be reached first. If such a situation exists, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S1406, a ball output adjustment process is executed. This process will be explained in detail later, but in the ball output adjustment process, the net increase in the number of coins per game is calculated based on the number of games in a specific section and the number of coins paid out, and based on the net increase in the number of coins, the AT type determination process is performed. and parameters used in the ceiling counter setting process.

After executing the process of step S1406, in step S1407, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit number of games, 1500, or whether the number of increased/decreased coins MY in the advantageous section is greater than or equal to the upper limit increase number 2400. Determine whether or not. If any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, the number of games AG in the advantageous section and the number of increase/decrease coins MY in the advantageous section are cleared to zero in step S1408. In the following step S1409, processing is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator. Then, in step S1410, parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section are initialized, and then the second section display process is ended.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S1410 is a process of returning the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section, and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. . For example, if the AT mode winning flag, AT mode flag, etc. are set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the precursor counter for the precursor mode, the counter for the number of consecutive games such as the CZ mode or the AT mode, etc. are larger than 0, all these counters are reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to press order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using press order notification, and clears the RAM with respect to such variables and parameters. This is a process that performs

If it is determined in step S1407 that the number of games in the favorable zone AG has not reached the upper limit and the number of increases/decreases in the favorable zone MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1411 to determine whether the normal end condition of the favorable zone has been established. More specifically, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag, the AT mode winning flag, and the AT mode flag are all set, and whether the number of remaining continuing games, including modes higher than the CZ mode, has become 0. If none of these flags are set, the process proceeds to step S1412, and a process is executed to subtract 1 from the favorable zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. As already explained, the favorable zone continuation counter is for counting the number of games in the favorable zone, which is not in the AT mode or CZ mode, and which has not won the transition lottery to the AT mode or CZ mode (normal favorable zone), and for example, 100 is input as a predetermined value in a game in which the favorable zone transition lottery has been won (step S709). After executing the process in step S1412, it is determined in step S1415 whether the favorable zone continuation counter has become 0. If it is not 0, the second section display process ends. If the favorable section continuation counter becomes 0, proceed to step S1408, perform the processing for the end of the favorable section in steps S1408 to S1410, and then end the second section display process.

<About the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be explained with reference to FIG. 42.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 42, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, press order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the performance related to the instruction function, as opposed to the advantageous section that has the performance related to the instruction function such as pressing order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, if you win the lottery to move to the advantageous section, for example, by winning the small winning combination 7 (watermelon), the number of games executed in the advantageous section will be counted from the game following the game in which the game result that triggered the win is established ( Counting of the number of advantageous zone games AG) is started. Then, if you win the lottery to switch to AT mode during the advantageous section, and the winning notification and AT mode flag are set, etc., and a push order notification can occur, the condition for starting the display on the section indicator is met. As a result, the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

Thereafter, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit, press order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, as described above, press order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player presses the button based on the press order information. Be able to understand the order. In the press order notification, the display of the press order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If such a game is not the last game of the advantageous section, when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends, and the eighth display The display of the advantageous section by segment N8 continues. If the player wins the push order combination again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase, etc., and the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 also turns off and the information of the advantageous section is notified. ends. In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout is finished (by the section display second process which is the process after the payout determination process). Note that if no medals are paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game is the final game in the advantageous section.

As mentioned above, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted from the game following the game that won the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, while the press order notification is only made during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Occur. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, the push order notification does not occur in the section where the eighth display segment N8 is off (non-specific section). In other words, by checking whether or not the 8th display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to at least enjoy the benefits of press order notification among advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). It is now possible to clearly understand the By doing this, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between a player who ends the game without knowing that he is in a situation where he can enjoy the benefits of push order notification and a successor player who takes his seat afterwards. You can do it like this. In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, press order notification does not occur, so it is possible to gracefully end the game.

In this way, in this slot machine 10, by winning the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section, the player can move to the advantageous section, and by shifting to the AT mode in the advantageous section, the press order notification can be generated. It is possible to win many medals by winning the bell according to the press order notification. On the other hand, in the advantageous section, multiple forced termination conditions such as the maximum number of games and the maximum number of medal increases are predetermined, and if the maximum number of games is reached, even if the maximum number of medals has not been reached, it will give you an advantage. The section ends, and even if the maximum number of games has not been reached, the advantageous section ends when the maximum number of medal increases is reached. In this respect, in order to enjoy the game for a longer period of time, it is preferable that the advantageous section continues until the upper limit number of games, and more preferably, the upper limit increase number is reached in the games that reach the upper limit number of games.

As already explained, in a 3-bet game where the 2nd BB win is carried over, the net increase in coins is minus about 2.10 coins, and even if it is an advantageous area, if the push order notification does not occur, the number of coins per game is Approximately 2.10 medals may be reduced. On the other hand, if you shift to AT mode and the press order notification starts to occur, it will be possible to achieve 1 small win to 6 small win when each press order bell is won, and the net increase during that AT mode. The number of sheets is plus approximately 8.04 sheets. In this case, if AT mode continues for about 300 games in the advantageous section, it will reach the upper limit of 2400 coins, and the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated by the forced termination of the upper limit increase before the upper limit of games is reached. Probability is high. In other words, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated without a sufficient number of games in the advantageous section being played, and the player may not be able to enjoy the game for a longer period of time. However, reducing the number of medals when winning the push order bell, which is the main reason for increasing medals in AT mode, or lowering the winning probability of the push order bell is not effective in improving the interest of each game. Undesirable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is provided in which various adjustments of the AT mode are made in the advantageous section by taking into account the current increase or decrease in the number of medals. The adjustment process will be described below.

<Processing for ball output adjustment>
In this embodiment, a plurality of states are set that can affect the ball output performance (increase rate of medals) in AT mode, and more specifically, they affect the appearance rate of AT mode and the type of AT mode at the time of appearance. There are multiple consecutive winning states that can affect the game. The multiple consecutive winning states are set as a high consecutive winning state, a medium consecutive winning state, and a low consecutive winning state.The high consecutive winning state has the highest increase rate of medals due to AT mode, and the low consecutive winning state has the highest medal increase rate in AT mode. The rate of increase in medals depending on the mode is the lowest. In the ball output adjustment process of step S1406 in the second section display process, these successive winning states are set based on the current increase rate of medals. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the ball output adjustment process.

In step S1601, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed. That is, it is determined whether this is after the transition to the advantageous section, after the AT mode winning notification is performed, and after the transition to the specific section where a substantial increase in medals can be expected. If it is after the AT mode winning notification, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the game result of the current game is any replay winning. If there is no winning in any re-game, the process advances to step S1603. In step S1601, the AT mode winning notification has not been carried out since the shift to the advantageous section, and if it is a non-specific section before moving to the specific section, or in step S1602, the game result of the current game is If it is any re-game winning, the process for adjusting the ball output is directly ended without performing the process for setting the consecutive winning state after step S1603.

In step S1603, the number of medals paid out in the current game is grasped, and processing is executed to add the grasped number of medals paid out to the consecutive game out counter OC provided in the various counter areas 106e. The consecutive winnings out counter OC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the total number of medals paid out after a specific section has been reached. For example, if the game result of the current game is 1 small win and 13 medals are paid out, 13 is added to the consecutive winnings out counter OC. Further, if the game result of the current game is a losing result and no small winning combination has been achieved, a process of adding 0 to the consecutive game out counter OC is executed. By the way, the number of increase/decrease in the number of coins MY in the advantageous section indicates the increase/decrease in the number of coins that takes into account the number of coins bet, and can be subtracted in games where no payout occurs, whereas the consecutive winning out counter OC indicates the number of coins bet. It is different in that it shows the number of coins to be paid out without consideration, and is not subtracted even in games where no payout occurs.

In the subsequent step S1604, a process of adding 1 to a consecutive game number counter GC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The consecutive game number counter GC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games played after a specific section has been reached. By the way, the number of games in the advantageous section AG indicates the total number of games played in the advantageous section, whereas the number of consecutive games counter GC indicates the number of games played after the actual increase in medals. They differ in some respects.

In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the consecutive games out counter OC resulting from the process of step S1603 is 6 times or more the consecutive game number counter GC resulting from the process of step S1604. do. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1605 is the case where the average number of medals paid out per game in a 3-bet game is 6 or more (the net increase in medals in a 3-bet game is 3 or more), and the payout rate is This is a case where (the ratio of the number of acquired medals to the number of inserted medals) is 200% or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, a process of inputting 2 into the second offset counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1606. The second offset counter is one of a plurality of parameters provided for setting the continuous play state in the AT mode, and a value of 0 to 2 is input to the second offset counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1605, it is determined in step S1607 whether the consecutive game out counter OC is five times or more the value of the consecutive game number counter GC. An affirmative determination in step S1607 means that the average number of medals paid out per game in a 3-bet game is 5 or more (the net increase in medals in a 3-bet game is 3 or more), and the payout rate is is 166% or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1607, a process of inputting 1 to the second offset counter is executed in step S1608. If a negative determination is made in step S1607, a process of inputting 0 to the second offset counter is executed in step S1609.

After executing any one of steps S1606, S1608, and S1609, the process advances to step S1610. The processing in steps S1610 and S1611 is a process for determining whether the situation is close to the fulfillment of the forced termination condition for the advantageous section. That is, in step S1610, it is determined whether the current number of games in the advantageous section is close to the upper limit number of games, and more specifically, 70% of 1500, which is the upper limit of the number of games AG in the advantageous section. It is determined whether the value is 1300 or more. Furthermore, in step S1611, it is determined whether the current number of medals increased or decreased is close to the upper limit increase number, more specifically, it is 70% or more of 2400, which is the upper limit of the number MY of increased/decreased medals in the advantageous section. It is determined whether the value is 2000 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in either step S1610 or step S1611, in step S1612, a process of inputting 4 into the first offset counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed, and then a process for main ball output adjustment is executed. finish. The first offset counter is one of a plurality of parameters provided for setting the continuous play state in the AT mode, and a value of 0 to 4 is input to the first offset counter.

If a negative determination is made in both step S1610 and step S1611, and the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is not yet satisfied, in steps S1613 to S1619, the number of consecutive games counter GC is determined. 1 Execute the process of inputting a different value to the offset counter. That is, in step S1613, it is determined whether or not the consecutive games counter GC is greater than 500. In step S1613, if the number of games since the specific section in the advantageous section has exceeded 500, in step S1614 a process of inputting 3 to the first offset counter is executed, and then the main output Finish the ball adjustment process.

If the consecutive game number counter GC is 500 or less in step S1613, it is determined whether the consecutive game number counter GC is greater than 200 in step S1615. In step S1615, if the number of games after entering the specific section is between 200 and 500 games, in step S1616 a process is executed to input 2 into the first offset counter, and then the main output The ball adjustment process ends.

If the consecutive game number counter GC is 200 or less in step S1615, it is determined whether the consecutive game number counter GC is greater than 100 in step S1617. In step S1617, if the number of games after the specific period is between 100 and 200 games, in step S1618, a process of inputting 1 to the first offset counter is executed, and then the main output The ball adjustment process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1617 that the number of games after the increase in medals in the advantageous section is up to 100 games, then in step S1619 a process of inputting 0 to the first offset counter is executed, and then The main ball adjustment process ends.

<Continued home status table>
The consecutive winning state that is set based on the input of the first offset counter and the second offset counter in the ball output adjustment process as described above will be described. FIG. 44 shows an example of a consecutive game status table stored in the various table storage area 105a.

As mentioned above, the AT mode continuous play states are set to a high consecutive play state, a medium consecutive play state, and a low consecutive play state, and the parameters that determine these continuous play states are the first offset counter and the second An offset counter is set. The first offset counter is determined by the consecutive game number counter GC and the forced termination condition of the advantageous section, and the second offset counter is determined by the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC. (net increase in number of sheets).

For example, the case where 0 is input to the first offset counter means that the number of games after entering the specific section is 100 or less, and in this situation, regardless of the value of the second offset counter, It is set to Korenso state. On the other hand, if the number of games after entering the specific section exceeds 100 and 1 to 3 are input to the first offset counter, the consecutive game status will differ depending on the value of the second offset counter. Become. In other words, if the number of games after entering the specific section is 100 to 200 games and 1 is input to the first offset counter, a situation where the net increase in the number of coins with a ball output rate of less than 166% is less than 2 coins. (Second Offset Counter = 0), the state is set to high success rate, but if the ball output rate is 166% or more and the net increase in number of coins is 2 or more (Second Offset Counter = 1, 2), The status is set to ``Bachurenso''. In addition, if the number of games after entering the specific section is 200 or more and 2 or 3 is input in the first offset counter, a situation where the net increase in the number of coins with a ball output rate of less than 166% is less than 2 coins. (Second offset counter = 0), the state is set to high success rate, but the situation is such that the net increase in number of coins is 2 or more and less than 3 with a ball output rate of 166% to 200% (Second offset counter = 1) ), the state is set to medium consecutive winnings, and if the ball output rate is 200% or more and the net increase in number of coins is 3 or more (second offset counter = 2), the low consecutive winnings state is set.

In addition, if the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section are about to be met and 4 is entered in the first offset counter, regardless of the ball output rate (net increase in number of coins, value of the second offset counter), low consecutive winnings will occur. set to state.

Incidentally, when the initialization process (step S1410) is performed when the advantageous section ends, both the first offset counter and the second offset counter are set to 0. Therefore, when moving to an advantageous section, the consecutive winnings state will start from the high consecutive winnings state.

The following describes the configuration in which the consecutive win state of the AT mode set in this manner affects the ball output performance of the AT mode. In this embodiment, an AT type determination process and a ceiling counter setting process are set as processes (processes for adjusting ball output performance) that refer to the consecutive win state of the AT mode and determine whether or not to improve the ball output performance (cause an advantageous event). The AT type determination process is a process for determining the type of the current AT mode when transition to the AT mode is permitted, and is a process executed in step S1210 in the game number management process (Figure 38). The ceiling counter setting process is a process for determining the next ceiling when the AT mode is ended, and is a process executed in step S1115 in the winning result response process (Figure 37).

<AT type determination process>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing AT type determination processing.

In step S1701, processing for acquiring an AT type table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. Then, in step S1702, processing is executed to grasp the current consecutive rental status. In addition, when grasping the consecutive game status, the above-mentioned consecutive game status table, the first offset counter, and the second offset counter are referred to.

As shown in FIG. 46, the AT type table is set so that the selection rate of the first AT mode and the second AT mode differs depending on the set consecutive rental status. As already explained, the first AT mode is an AT mode in which the maximum number of medals to be paid out is set as 100, and the second AT mode is an AT mode in which the maximum number of medals to be paid out is set as 200. The second AT mode is a more advantageous AT mode for the player. In these AT modes, although there is no transition of the gaming state, the so-called bonus symbols such as "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, etc. may line up on a predetermined line and stop in the starting game. Yes (Figure 14), and after that, it becomes possible to obtain medals by notification of the push order, so it is called a pseudo bonus in contrast to the game state where the bonus symbols are aligned and the gaming state shifts to the bonus state. be. The first AT mode is called a pseudo regular bonus (pseudo RB) in which a small number of pseudo bonuses are paid out, and the second AT mode is called a pseudo big bonus (pseudo BB) in which a large number of pseudo bonuses are paid out. .

When in a high consecutive win state, the first AT mode as a pseudo RB and the second AT mode as a pseudo BB are selected about half and half. More specifically, the probability that the second AT mode is selected is slightly higher, and the selection rates of the first AT mode and the second AT mode are about 46.88% and about 53.13%, respectively. When in a medium consecutive win state, the probability that the first AT mode is selected is higher than the probability that the second AT mode is selected, and the selection rates of each AT mode are about 65.63% and about 34.38%, respectively. And, when in a low consecutive win state, the first AT mode is selected, but the second AT mode is not selected.

In step S1703, the current AT mode is determined based on the acquired AT type table, the consecutive game status ascertained from the consecutive game status table and each offset counter, and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 106e. The type will be determined by lottery. Then, after temporarily storing the determined AT mode type in a register or the like, this AT type determination process is ended. In this case, in step S1211 that is executed following the AT type determination process, the type of AT mode determined in the AT type determination process is determined, and if it is the first AT mode, the transition to the first AT mode is performed. A process is executed to indicate that the transition to the second AT mode is permitted (step S1212), and if the mode is the second AT mode, a process is executed to indicate that the transition to the second AT mode is permitted (step S1212). S1213).

<Ceiling counter setting process>
Next, the ceiling counter setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the stock counter in the various counter areas 106e is 1 or more. As already explained, the stock counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining sets in AT mode. For example, if 1 is input to the stock counter, the number of sets remaining in AT mode is , the next AT mode transition is allowed. If the stock counter is 1 or more, the stock counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802, 0 is input to the ceiling counter in step S1803, and then the main ceiling counter setting process is executed. finish. That is, for example, if the stock counter is 1 at the end of the first AT mode, 0 is input to the ceiling counter, so that in the AT lottery process (FIG. 29) of the next game after the end of the first AT mode, the AT Regardless of the result of the mode lottery process, the AT mode winning flag is set (step S815→step S808).

If it is determined in step S1801 that the stock counter is 0, the process advances to step S1804. In step S1804, processing is performed to obtain a ceiling table from the various table storage areas 105a. Then, in step S1805, similar to step S1702 described above, processing is performed to grasp the current consecutive game status based on the consecutive game status table and each offset counter. In the following step S1806, a process is performed to understand the setting value set in the winning probability setting process.

As shown in FIG. 48, the ceiling table is set so that the value of the ceiling counter to be selected differs depending on the current consecutive rental status and the set value. In more detail, three types of ceiling modes are set depending on the value of the selected ceiling counter: super heaven mode, heaven mode, and normal mode. The selection rates are different.

The super heaven mode is a ceiling mode in which a value of 1 to 30 is set as a ceiling counter, and it is a ceiling mode in which the game shifts to the next AT mode within 30 games after the end of the first AT mode. . The heaven mode is a ceiling mode in which a value of 31 to 100 is set as a ceiling counter, and a transition is made to the next AT mode within 100 games after the end of the first AT mode. The normal mode is a ceiling mode in which one value from 101 to 999 is set as a ceiling counter, and after the end of the first AT mode, unless you win the AT mode transition lottery, you can play 999 games which is the maximum ceiling. This is the ceiling mode in which the AT mode winning flag is not set until the end.

In this embodiment, when setting the ceiling counter, first the Super Heaven mode, Heaven mode, and normal mode are allocated, and then the detailed ceiling counter value is selected. As shown in FIG. 48, the allocation rate for each mode is set to differ depending on the current winning streak and the set value. In contrast, after allocation to each mode, the value to be selected is determined randomly within the range of each mode.

In the Korenso state, no matter what the setting value is, it will be assigned to any mode: super heaven mode, heaven mode, and normal mode, and it will be easy to be assigned to heaven mode, and then it will be easy to be assigned to normal mode, It is difficult to be classified into super heaven mode. The probability of being assigned to the super heaven mode or the heaven mode is highest for setting 5, and decreases in the order of setting 3, setting 1, setting 4, setting 2, and setting 6. In other words, setting 6, which is the highest setting, is difficult to classify into super heaven mode or heaven mode even in the high-rent state.

In the mid-level state, as in the above-mentioned high-level state, any setting value can be assigned to any mode: super heaven mode, heaven mode, or normal mode; The probability of being assigned to the mode is lower than in the Korenso state. In other words, in a medium-term play state, it is easier to be assigned to the normal mode than in a high-term play state.

In the low consecutive shooting state, no matter what the setting value is, it cannot be assigned to super heaven mode or heaven mode. In other words, in the low consecutive play state, the ceiling mode after the end of the AT mode is assigned to the normal mode, regardless of the setting value.

In the ceiling counter setting process, in step S1807, a ceiling mode lottery process is performed using the ceiling table, consecutive winning states, set values, and lottery counter. Thereafter, in step S1808, the current number of ceiling games is determined by lottery within the range of the number of games in the ceiling mode determined in step S1807. In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery for the number of ceiling games is randomly determined, but for example, the number of games that are easy to select or the number of games that are difficult to select are set, The selection rate of the number of games that are difficult to play or the number of games may be configured to vary depending on the setting value or the consecutive game status.

After executing the process of step S1808, in step S1809, a process of inputting the number of ceiling games determined in step S1808 to a ceiling counter is executed. Thereafter, in step S1810, a process of inputting 100 into the advantageous section continuation counter is executed, and then the main ceiling counter setting process is ended. As already explained, the advantageous section continuation counter corresponds to the number of games in which the advantageous section continues without being in AT mode or CZ mode and without winning in AT mode or CZ mode. In other words, as described above, if the normal mode is selected as the ceiling mode and the number of ceiling games within the range of the normal mode (101 to 999) is input to the ceiling counter, the advantageous section is entered before the ceiling counter reaches 0. is completed, and the ceiling counter is reset. In this case, when moving to the next advantageous section, the ceiling number of games is newly set.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the ceiling value set in the AT ceiling setting process that is performed upon winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, and the ceiling value set at the end of the AT mode. As already explained, the maximum value of the ceiling value set when winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is 999, and the maximum value of the ceiling value set at the end of the AT mode is also 999, which are common. On the other hand, the ceiling value that is set when you win the lottery to move to the advantageous section is, on average, a smaller ceiling value (shallow ceiling) than the ceiling value that is set as the normal mode when AT mode ends. It's getting easier. Therefore, when the vehicle shifts to the advantageous section, it can be expected that the ceiling counter will become 0 and the vehicle will shift to the AT mode even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won.

Furthermore, in the high-resistance state, super heaven mode, heaven mode, and normal mode are selected as the ceiling mode, and in the low-response state, the normal mode is selected as the heaven mode, so the high-resistance state is The configuration is such that the normal mode is selected as the heaven mode regardless of whether the game is in the low-consecution state or the low-consecution state. Therefore, the maximum value of the ceiling value set at the end of the AT mode is 999, which is the same regardless of the consecutive play state.

<Succession status and medal increase/decrease status>
The progress of the game and the increase and decrease of medals when the consecutive winning state is set as described above and the ball output performance in the AT mode is adjusted will be explained with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

If the AT mode is started at the timing t2 after shifting to the advantageous section at the timing t1, the section from the timing t2 becomes the display target section of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator, and the timing at the timing t2. Updates of the consecutive games out counter OC and the consecutive games number counter GC are started using a subsequent game that is not a replay winning game (for example, a bell winning game) as the starting game.

Here, as already explained, the game in which the first AT mode or the second AT mode is started is a game in which the normal reply B or the normal reply C is won. In other words, a game in which the AT mode is started and the AT mode flag is set so that the section display is displayed is a game that results in a replay, and in that game, consecutive game out counter OC or consecutive game game The number counter GC is not updated. In this way, in a configuration in which a game that results in a replay win is not the target for updating each counter, by making a game that starts updating each counter as a replay win, it is possible to The process (display start process of the section display) and the update process are not performed overlappingly, and the process is distributed.

At t2, when starting the AT mode, AT type determination processing is performed to determine the type of AT mode to which the transition is made. As described above, as for the AT type, in the first AT mode, the upper limit number of coins to be paid out is 100 coins, and in the second AT mode, the upper limit number of coins to be paid out is 200 coins. In the AT type determination process at t2, it is assumed that the second AT mode is determined, and the second AT mode ends at timing t3 when 200 or more medals are paid out. When the AT mode ends, the ceiling mode is set in a ceiling counter setting process. At t3, heaven mode is set, and consecutive wins within 100 games are confirmed. In the game t4, which is set as the heaven mode and the ceiling counter for which a value of 100 or less is input becomes 0, a shift to the next AT mode occurs. At t4, the first AT mode is determined, and the first AT mode ends at timing t5 when 100 or more medals are paid out.

Here, as described above, in the ball output adjustment process, the net increase in the number of coins is calculated using the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC, and the second offset counter is calculated according to the calculated net increase in the number of coins. Determine the value of In this case, the game in which the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC are updated is the game after the transition to AT mode occurred in the advantageous section, as described above, and the game after that is also the game that updates the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC. Games that win prizes are excluded from updates. Therefore, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 49, in the AT mode starting from t2, when calculating the net increase in the number of coins by using a game that wins a bell (a game indicated as "be" in the diagram) as the calculation starting game, The number of replays is higher than the net increase in the number of coins, including games that result in a winning result, games that result in a loss (games indicated as "x" in the figure), and games that result in replay winnings (games indicated as "R" in the figure). The net increase in the number of medals excluding games that result in winnings is greater (in the figure, the slope of the graph indicating the increase in medals is steeper). Therefore, rather than using the net increase in the number of coins, including games that result in replay winnings, as input to each offset counter, it is easier to input a large value to each offset counter, and the consecutive winning state in AT mode is in a low consecutive winning state or a medium consecutive winning state. It is easy to set to . In other words, as in the above configuration, by using the net increased number of medals that do not include games that result in replay winnings as input to each offset counter, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of medal payouts that greatly exceed the design value. It becomes possible.

Moreover, as described above, by using the net increase in the number of coins that does not include games that result in replay winnings in the AT mode ball output adjustment, even if the probability of replay winning changes depending on the gaming state, It is also possible to adjust the payout in AT mode based on the net increase in the number of coins without considering changes in the gaming status. It becomes possible to adjust the ball output while minimizing the influence of events such as missing balls.

In FIG. 49, in the setting process of each AT mode after timing t6 (AT type determination process and ceiling counter setting process), the medals are displayed when the consecutive winning state set by the ball output adjustment process is not referenced. It shows the increase.

That is, if the Super Heaven mode is selected as the ceiling mode at t7 when the second AT mode that started at t6 ends, a transition to the AT mode occurs again at t8, which is within 30 games. In this case, the AT mode is also the second AT mode, and if the Super Heaven mode is also selected as the ceiling mode after the second AT mode, a transition to the AT mode occurs again at t9, which is within 30 games. The second AT mode is also selected at t9, and the consecutive wins in the Super Heaven mode continue thereafter. In the figure, the upper limit payout number of 2400 coins in the favorable zone is reached in the middle of the second AT mode that starts at t10, and the favorable zone is forcibly terminated. Note that the calculation of the upper limit payout number begins at t2, when a substantial increase in coins occurs, rather than at t1, which is the start of the favorable zone.

In contrast, Figure 50 shows how medals increase when the consecutive win state set by the ball payout adjustment process is referenced in the setting process for each AT mode (AT type determination process and ceiling counter setting process) from timing t26 onwards, after the start of the advantageous zone, the start of measurement of the advantageous zone increase/decrease coin count MY, consecutive win out counter OC, and consecutive win game count counter GC from t21 to t25, similar to t1 to t5 in Figure 49.

That is, in the ceiling counter setting process performed at the timing t27 when the second AT mode that started at the timing t26 ends, the ceiling mode is set after referring to the continuous shooting state defined by each offset counter. will be held. For example, at time t27, if the AT mode continuous play state is defined as a medium continuous play state, in this embodiment, even if the continuous play state is not a high continuous play state but a medium continuous play state, the ceiling mode Since the super heaven mode may be selected as the super heaven mode, the super heaven mode may be selected at t27. In this case, similar to the AT mode at t8 after the second AT mode ends at t7, the AT mode is shifted again at t28, which is within 30 games from t27. However, at t28, the AT type determination process is performed again with reference to the consecutive winning states defined by each offset counter. The figure shows a case where the player is in a middle-of-the-road state at t28 and the first AT mode is selected. In this case, in the case of t8 described above, the number of medals to be paid out is shifted to the second AT mode with a maximum payout number of 200 pieces, whereas at t28, the number of medals paid out is shifted to the first AT mode with a maximum number of payouts of 100 pieces, and the medal increase is It will be suppressed.

If heaven mode is selected as the ceiling mode instead of super heaven mode at t29 when the first AT mode started at t28 ends, super heaven mode is selected when the second AT mode started at t8 ends. Compared to the case where it is selected, in the case of t29, the transition to the next AT mode (reaching the ceiling) occurs later in the game. In other words, the increase in medals is also suppressed by selecting the ceiling mode. Then, at t30, which is 31 to 100 games after t29, the game shifts to the AT mode again. For example, at t30, if the player is still in the middle of the season, the second AT mode may also be selected. In other words, as mentioned above, even in a situation where the increase in medals is suppressed, not only the first AT mode but also the second AT mode can be selected as an AT type, so there is an extreme restriction on the number of balls that can be issued. This prevents the player from losing his or her desire to play.

At t31 when the second AT mode started at t30 ends, the ceiling mode is set to the normal mode. As a result, the transition to the next AT mode will occur after the 101st game, unless the player wins the AT mode lottery process, and after the advantageous period ends. Here, a case is shown in which the AT mode lottery process is won within 100 games, and at t33, t34, and t35, a transition to the first AT mode occurs within 100 games, and at t36, the upper limit of the advantageous section This indicates that the increased number of sheets has reached 2,400 sheets. In this case, t36 is a slower game than t11 (t32 in FIG. 50) at which the upper limit increase number was reached when the ball output adjustment did not function in FIG. 49, and the game was played over a longer game in a more advantageous period. becomes.

<About the performance during forced termination>
In this embodiment, when the advantageous section ends due to the fulfillment of any forced termination condition, a special performance as an ending performance is generated. The process for setting the effect at the time of forced termination will be explained with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51(a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of forced termination, which is executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 as a sub control device. The effect setting process is started at a predetermined period (2 msec period), for example.

In step S1901, it is determined whether an advantageous section initialization command has been received from the main controller 101. The advantageous section initialization command is a command output when executing the initialization process (step S1410) at the end of the advantageous section in the second section display process (FIG. 40) on the main controller 101 side. The advantageous section initialization command includes information on the event that triggered the end of the advantageous section. If the advantageous section initialization command has not been received in step S1901, it is not the forced termination timing, and the present effect setting process is immediately terminated. If it has been received, the process advances to step S1902.

In step S1902, based on the received advantageous section initialization command, it is determined whether the event that triggered the end of the current advantageous section is an event in which any forced termination condition is satisfied. . If any of the forced termination conditions are not satisfied, but the termination is normal, that is, 100 games have been played after AT mode, etc., and the process has gone through steps S1411 to S1413, it is assumed that it is not the forced termination timing. The main performance setting process is then terminated. If any of the forced termination conditions are satisfied, the process advances to step S1903.

In step S1903, it is determined whether the current forced termination condition is whether or not the game is terminated by reaching the upper limit number of games. If the upper limit number of games has been reached and the game has not ended, this indicates that the game has ended because the upper limit increase number has been reached, and in this case, in step S1904, a process for determining the remaining number of games up to the upper limit number of games is executed. More specifically, for example, if the number of games from the start of the advantageous period is 1350 games, it is determined that the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is 150 games. In the following step S1905, it is determined whether the number of games grasped in step S1904 is less than a predetermined number of games, which is less than 200 games. If the number of games is not less than 200, in step S1906, the first special performance is set to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 as the performance at the time of forced termination, and then the main performance setting process is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that there are fewer than 200 games, in step S1907, a second special effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 as the effect at the time of forced termination. After setting, the main effect setting process ends. If it is determined in step S1903 that the game has ended by reaching the upper limit number of games, in step S1908, a third special performance is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 as a performance at the time of forced termination. After setting, the main effect setting process ends.

In this embodiment, the first special performance, the second special performance, and the third special performance are set to have different display contents on the auxiliary display section 65 and sound effects from the speaker 64, and each special performance is different from the other. It is possible for the player to identify whether or not the game is being played. Furthermore, these first special performance, second special performance, and third special performance are respectively first special performance A, first special performance B, second special performance A, second special performance B, third special performance A, A third special performance B is set, and the display contents on the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects from the speaker 64 are different between each special performance A and special performance B to such an extent that the player can identify them.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when each special performance is performed, whether special performance A or special performance B will be performed depends on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. are configured differently. That is, when the first special performance is performed, in settings 1, 3, and 5, the first special performance A is selected with a probability of 60%, and the first special performance B is selected with a probability of 40%. On the other hand, in settings 2, 4, and 6, the first special performance A is selected with a probability of 40%, and the first special performance B is selected with a probability of 60%. In other words, if the advantageous section ends with a large number of games (200 or more) left up to the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number is reached, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the evenness of the setting values is executed as the first special effect. Ru.

On the other hand, when the second special performance is performed, in settings 1, 3, and 5, the second special performance A is selected with a probability of 5%, and the second special performance B is selected with a probability of 95%. . On the other hand, in settings 2, 4, and 6, the second special performance A is selected with a probability of 95%, and the second special performance B is selected with a probability of 5%. In other words, if the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number and ends in a situation where the upper limit number of games is only a few (less than 200 games), this suggests that the set values are even or odd, and compared to the case of the first special effect described above. A setting value suggestion performance that makes it easy to determine whether the settings are even or odd is executed as a second special performance.

When the third special effect is performed, in settings 1 to 3, the third special effect A is selected with a probability of 5%, and the third special effect B is selected with a probability of 95%. In contrast, in settings 4 to 6, the third special effect A is selected with a probability of 95%, and the third special effect B is selected with a probability of 5%. In other words, when the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit number of games and ends, a setting value suggestion effect suggesting whether the setting value is high or low is executed as the third special effect.

Assuming that in these setting value suggestion effects, the player will play on a machine with a high setting value, it is preferable for the player to have the third special effect, which allows the player to determine whether the setting value is high or low, performed, followed by the second special effect, which allows the player to determine whether the setting value is even or odd. In other words, when the first to third special effects are performed, the third special effect will provide the most advantageous benefit to the player, followed by the second special effect, which provides the most advantageous benefit.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the ball payout adjustment process, the net increase in the number of coins (ball payout rate) calculated by the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC is used to set the second offset counter, and the consecutive game state is determined by the second offset counter. Depending on the consecutive game state, the probability that the second AT mode will be selected in the AT type determination process and the probability that the Super Heaven mode will be selected in the ceiling counter setting process are different. This makes it possible to eliminate events in which the net increase in the number of coins becomes extremely large or extremely small, and makes it possible to increase or decrease the number of game media as designed.

In particular, in an advantageous section, when the number of increase/decrease coins MY in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, the number of games AG in the advantageous section is forcibly terminated even if it has not reached the upper limit number of games, so even if the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous section is large. If it becomes too much, the advantageous section is likely to be forcibly terminated when the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number, that is, the advantageous section is ended without reaching the upper limit number of games. In this case, it becomes impossible for the player to enjoy the advantageous section for a long time. Therefore, in the above configuration, when the net increase in the number of tickets is large, it is made easier to enter a low consecutive ticket state as a continuous ticket condition, thereby suppressing the net increase in ticket numbers, making it possible to enjoy the advantageous section for a longer period of time.

The calculation of the net increase in number of coins using the consecutive game counter GC and consecutive out counter OC is configured to be performed for each game except for games that are the result of replay during AT mode in the ball output adjustment process. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the calculation is performed only for the game for which the net increase in number of coins is to be used, the processing load for each game is standardized, and processing is optimized through the distribution of the processing load.

In particular, by not including information about the game that is the result of replay in the calculation of the net increase in number of coins, it is possible to avoid the net increase in number of coins being diluted (reduced) by the coincidence of many wins in the replay result, and after appropriately grasping the actual medal increase/decrease rate (ball payout rate), it is possible to perform feedback control by setting the consecutive win state using the actual medal increase/decrease rate.

In this case, the starting game of the AT mode, in which the updating of the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC and the calculation of the net increase number of coins, is the replay game such as normal rep B and regular rep C. It's a game of consequences. In other words, in a game that starts updating these counters or calculating the number of net additions, only the process of starting the update or calculation (processing of setting the AT mode flag) is performed, and in reality, the process starts from the next game. Updates and calculations will begin. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate local increases in processing load through dispersion of processing.

Furthermore, in the AT mode transition lottery, the main result of winning the transition lottery (the result that is often the trigger for winning) is the replay result, such as Chance A to Chance C or Cherry A to Cherry C. It has become. Therefore, in the situation where the above-mentioned consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC are updated and the net increase number is calculated, the games that win the AT mode transfer lottery again are the results of these replays. There is a high possibility that it is a game that is. In other words, the information about the winning game that will be transferred to the AT mode again is not taken into consideration when updating each of the counters and calculating the net increase in the number of coins. By doing this, in order to reduce the net increase in the number of coins, you will not be forced to miss out on the game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery, and for games where the AT mode transition lottery is held, It becomes possible to concentrate on the game (enjoy it without considering the net increase in the number of cards).

In addition, although the consecutive game count counter GC does not include information on games that will result in a replay, it does have an advantageous zone game count AG that includes information on games that will result in a replay. Therefore, by using it appropriately depending on the purpose, whether you want to manage games that will result in a replay or not, it becomes possible to appropriately manage ball payouts, etc.

The consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC are configured to be updated after the section indicator starts displaying in an advantageous section, and updates are performed in a situation where a substantial increase in medals can be expected (AT mode). I decided to do it. In this way, updates are not started in situations where there is virtually no increase in medals, making it possible to efficiently identify events where the net increase in the number of medals increases and the medal increase rate exceeds the design value. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, once the updating of the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC is started, the updating is continued even if it is not in the AT mode as long as it is an advantageous section. Here, after the end of AT mode, the advantageous section is maintained for 100 games, so even if heaven mode is selected as the ceiling mode or normal mode is selected, the transition to AT mode will occur by the said 100 games. If you win the lottery, the AT mode will be played consecutively in the same advantageous section without crossing over the normal section. Because of this configuration, as described above, if the update is continued even after AT mode if it is an advantageous section, the net increase in the number of tickets during one advantageous section (during consecutive games) can be calculated suitably. becomes possible.

The consecutive games state table reflects not only the value of the second offset counter but also the value of the first offset counter, and the first offset counter is mainly determined by the consecutive games number counter GC. . That is, the configuration is such that the consecutive game status is set by taking into account not only the net increase in the number of tickets but also the information on the number of games used to calculate the net increase in the number of tickets. By doing this, it is possible to set the continuous winning state based on the net increase in number of coins while taking into consideration the phenomenon that the net increase in the number of coins increases due to a small number of games consecutively resulting in a large number of payouts. It becomes possible.

The consecutive game status determined by the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC is centrally managed as a process for adjusting the ball output, and the information on the consecutive game status is used in the AT type determination process, The system is configured to be used in processing for adjusting the ball output performance in different situations, such as ceiling counter setting processing. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and reduce the processing load by sharing the processing results such as the unified management of consecutive rental states.

In particular, between the AT type determination process as a process for adjusting the ball output performance and the ceiling counter setting process, the AT type determination process side has a setting difference (difference between the setting values set by the winning probability setting process). On the other hand, it is determined that there is no difference in settings in the ceiling counter setting process, and it is determined that there is no difference in settings for the centrally managed multi-unit status. By doing this, while centrally managing the information on consecutive winnings, it becomes possible to adjust the ball output performance with or without setting differences, increasing the usefulness of the information on consecutive winnings. ing.

The processing for adjusting each ball payout performance that shares the information on the winning streak status is performed in different games; one is performed at the start of AT mode, and the other is performed at the end of AT mode. Yes, it is done before and after the increase in medals such as AT mode. In the processing for adjusting the performance of each ball in this relationship, the information on the consecutive winning states that is centrally managed is shared, and the information on the consecutive winning states is updated every game. Also in the adjustment process, it becomes possible to adjust the ball dispensing performance using the latest information.

After moving to the advantageous section, the advantageous section will continue for 100 games even if you do not win AT mode, and even after the AT mode ends, the advantageous section will continue for 100 games. I did it like that. By doing so, the information on the ball payout rate is not managed for each AT mode, but it becomes possible to appropriately manage the information on the ball payout rate when the AT modes are consecutively played.

In addition, the advantageous period continues for 100 games after the end of the AT mode, that is, the advantageous period ends if the AT mode is not re-elected for 100 games. When the condition is about to be met, the number of games that exceed the ceiling number of 100 games is more likely to be selected in the ceiling counter setting process, so when the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is about to be met, the number of games that are more than 100 games is more likely to be selected. It is possible to make it easier to finish before the end. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to forced termination.

In this case, even if the advantageous section ends before the forced termination conditions are met as described above, the advantageous section transfer lottery will be conducted for all game results of each game excluding the losers, and Since the setting is made so that there is no possibility of non-winning in the section transition lottery, basically, after the advantageous section ends, the player immediately moves to a new advantageous section. In this case, from the state where the forced termination condition is about to be satisfied as described above, the number of games AG in the advantageous section is reset, and the game is transferred again as a brand new advantageous section. In this way, in a configuration that has an advantageous section with a forced termination condition such as a maximum number of games, by reducing the number of situations in which the system is forcibly terminated due to the maximum number of games, etc., the user does not become so aware of the maximum number of games in that advantageous section. This makes it possible to fully enjoy other game features (whether or not there is a shift to the AT mode and whether or not there is a series of games).

Moreover, once the advantageous period ends as described above, the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC are also initialized, and each offset counter also becomes its initial value, and the transition is made to the AT mode in the re-transferred advantageous period. When the transition occurs, the high consecutive home state is set as the high consecutive home state. As a result, when the AT mode continues to hit close to the upper limit in an advantageous section, it is set to a low consecutive hit state and the advantageous section ends once, and then immediately shifts to an advantageous section and is reset to a high consecutive win state. Thus, it is possible to realize cycle gameplay in which the AT mode consecutive games can be restarted.

In this case, at the beginning of the advantageous section, it is easy to be set to a high consecutive winning state, and at the end, it is easy to be set to a low consecutive winning state. In the final stages of the game, it is easy to be set to a low consecutive winning state, and in the early stages of the advantageous section on the rear side, it is easy to be set to a high consecutive winning state. In other words, when consecutive wins occur in an advantageous section, a set of situations in which a low consecutive win state is likely to be set and a situation in which a high consecutive win state is likely to be set can occur consecutively across the advantageous sections. In other words, it becomes difficult for a situation in which a high-stakes state is likely to occur to occur consecutively across advantageous sections. By doing this, by creating situations in which the ball payout rate is high and low in one advantageous section, while suppressing the ball payout rate from becoming too high during the advantageous section, it is possible to control the ball payout rate from becoming too high. While increasing the fun of the game by providing waves, the effect can be expected even across advantageous sections.

<Modification 1>
A modified example of the consecutive game status table will be explained.

In the consecutive game status table of FIG. 52, set values are set in addition to each offset counter as parameters for the consecutive game status. That is, for example, in a situation where the first offset counter is 0 and the consecutive game number counter GC is 100 or less, the second offset counter is 1, and the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC are In the first embodiment, when the net increase in number calculated is 2 or more and less than 3, the first embodiment is configured to uniformly set the state to the high-rent status, but in FIG. 52, settings 1, 3, In setting 5, the high-rent status is set, and in settings 2, 4, and 6, the medium-term status is set. Also, in a situation where the first offset counter is 0 and the consecutive game number counter GC is 100 or less, the second offset counter is 2, and the calculation is made using the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC. If the net increase in number of tickets is 3 or more, settings 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 set the state to a medium number of consecutive tickets, and setting 5 sets the state to a high number of consecutive tickets.

Furthermore, in a situation where the first offset counter is 2 and the consecutive game number counter GC is 201 to 500, the second offset counter is 1, and the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC are If the calculated net increase number is 2 or more but less than 3, settings 1, 2, 4, and 6 will set you to a low consecutive number of tickets, setting 3 will set you to a medium number of consecutive tickets, and setting 5 will set you to a high number of consecutive tickets. set to state.

In this way, by making the consecutive winning state itself, which is a common parameter used for adjusting the ball output rate in AT mode such as ceiling counter setting processing and AT type determination processing, different depending on the setting value, for example, It is possible to set different settings in one table for the ceiling counter (ceiling mode) set by the ceiling counter setting process and the AT mode type determined by the AT type determination process. In this case, there is no need to provide setting differences in the ceiling counter table or the AT type table, and the tables can be simplified. In addition, when using a ceiling counter table with setting differences as in the first embodiment, differences due to setting values will occur in a superimposed manner when setting the ceiling counter, and the setting differences will be highlighted. It is also possible to make it more complicated.

Incidentally, in FIG. 52 above, in a situation where the first offset counter is 3 and the consecutive game number counter GC is 501 or more, or in a situation where the first offset counter is 4 and the upper limit of the advantageous section is near, , so that no difference occurs due to the setting value. These situations are situations in which the effect of the consecutive winning state on the number of games in the advantageous section that can be played is particularly large, and by doing this, it is possible to optimize the play in the advantageous section regardless of the setting value. becomes possible.

In the consecutive game state table of FIG. 53, the first offset counter is 4, and the consecutive game state that is set in a situation where the upper limit of the advantageous section is near is different from that of the first embodiment. That is, in FIG. 53, in a situation where the first offset counter is 4 and the upper limit of the advantageous section is near, the high consecutive winning state is set regardless of the value of the second offset counter. In this way, in a situation where the upper limit of the advantageous section is near, the super heaven mode is more likely to be set as the ceiling mode, the second AT mode is more likely to be set as the AT type, and the increase rate of medals is increased.

Therefore, in a situation where either the forced termination condition such as the upper limit number of games or the increased number of games is about to be satisfied, the forced termination condition on the side of the increased number of games is more likely to be satisfied first. In this way, by making it more difficult to reach the maximum number of games, we will increase the rarity of the 2nd and 3rd special announcements, and by increasing their attention, we will be able to reach the maximum number of games. This makes it possible to increase expectations.

In addition, in FIG. 53, when the consecutive game number counter GC is 201 to 500 (the first offset counter is 2), and when the consecutive game number counter GC is 501 or more (the first offset counter is 2), is 3), the successive winning states according to the ball payout rate (value of the second offset counter) are different. Specifically, when the ball output rate is 166% or more and less than 200% (net increase number of coins is 2 or more and less than 3), if the number of consecutive games counter GC is 201 to 500, it will be set to a medium consecutive game state. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive games counter GC is 501 or more, a low consecutive games state is set.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the method of setting the first offset counter is different from the first embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ball output adjustment process in this modification.

In the ball output adjustment process in this modification, the part of the process for inputting to the first offset counter according to the value of the consecutive games counter GC is different, and the other processes are different from those in the first embodiment. It's the same. That is, the processing from step S2001 to step S2009 is similar to the processing from step S1601 to step S1609, in which the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC are updated, and the net increase in number of tickets is calculated based on these counters. Then, the second offset counter is set.

Furthermore, the processing from step S2010 to step S2012 is similar to the processing from step S1610 to step S1612, and if the situation is close to the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section, 4 is input to the first offset counter. If a negative determination is made in step S2011, a first offset counter is set based on the value of the consecutive games counter GC in steps S2013 to S2021.

That is, in step S2013, it is determined whether the consecutive game number counter GC is larger than 500 as a first predetermined number, and if it is larger than 500, 3 is input to the first offset counter in step S2014. After executing the process, the main ball output adjustment process is ended. Note that the processing in step S2013 and step S2014 is also similar to the processing in step S1613 and step S1614.

If it is determined in step S2013 that the number is 500 or less, it is determined in step S2015 whether or not the consecutive game number counter GC is larger than 200 as the second predetermined number, and if it is larger than 200, The process advances to step S2016. In this modification, in step S2016, a process is performed in which the value to be input to the first offset counter is determined by lottery. More specifically, a lottery is performed to input 1 into the first offset counter. Then, the lottery result is determined in step S2017, and if it is determined that the lottery result is a win, 1 is input to the first offset counter in step S2020, and if it is determined that the lottery result is not a win, step S2018 After executing the process of inputting 2 into the first offset counter, the main ball output adjustment process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2015 that it is 200 or less, it is determined in step S2019 whether or not the consecutive games counter GC is greater than 100. If it is larger, the first offset is determined in step S2020. 1 is input to the counter, and if it is 100 or less, 0 is input to the first offset counter in step S2021, and then the main ball output adjustment process is ended.

In this case, in a situation where the consecutive game number counter GC is 201 to 500, 1 may be input to the first offset counter, and 2 may be input to the first offset counter. By doing so, it is possible to generate randomness in which consecutive winning state is set. In other words, the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC are updated based on the results of the games, and by following the results of the games, the player can check the current consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC. It is possible to specify the value of the consecutive game out counter OC. Then, in a configuration where each offset counter or consecutive game status is uniquely determined from the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC, as in the first embodiment, the player can It can also be said that it is possible to play a game while specifying the state. In this regard, as in this modification, by making it possible to sometimes not be able to identify the consecutive game state from the consecutive game number counter GC or consecutive game out counter OC, it is possible to enjoy the game while predicting the consecutive game state. This makes it possible to significantly improve the gameplay.

Incidentally, the probability of winning the lottery in step S2016 is arbitrary, but for example, in this modification, it is set to have a probability of 30%. Note that the winning probability of the lottery process in step S2016 may be configured to vary depending on the setting value. For example, setting 6 may have the highest winning probability, and the lower the setting value, the lower the winning probability.

In addition, in a situation where the number of consecutive games counter GC is 201 to 500, the first offset counter is configured to input 1 or 2, but other values (0, 4) may also be input. good. Further, the number of games for which the value input to the first offset counter is random is not limited to the above, and may be a case where the consecutive game number counter GC is 501 or more, or a value between 0 and 200. This may be the case.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the information (parameters) used for inputting each offset counter is different from the first embodiment. That is, in the first embodiment, the first offset counter basically inputs a value based on the information of the consecutive game number counter GC, and the second offset counter inputs the value based on the information of the consecutive game number counter GC. Although the configuration was such that a value is input based on the information on the number of pure tickets calculated by the consecutive game out counter OC, in this modification, the first offset counter inputs the value based on the information on the number of advantageous section games AG. However, the second offset counter is configured to input a value based on information on the net increase in the number of coins calculated from the number of games AG in the advantageous section and the number of increase/decrease coins MY in the advantageous section.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the ball output adjustment process in this modification.

In steps S2101 and S2102, similar to the processing in steps S1601 and S1602 above, it is determined whether it is time to calculate the net increase in the number of coins for adjusting the number of coins dispensed and to change the value of each offset counter. That is, in step S2101, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator is being displayed, and in step S2102, it is determined whether the current game result is not a replay win. If the interval indicator is being displayed and none of the replay wins have been received, it proceeds to step S2103.

In steps S2103 to S2107, input processing for the second offset counter is performed based on the net increase in number of sheets in this modification. That is, in step S2103, it is determined whether the number of increased/decreased coins in the advantageous section MY is three times or more the number of games in the advantageous section AG. In this modification, it is determined whether the net increase in the number of coins calculated from the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY and the advantageous section game number AG is 3 or more (whether the ball output rate is 200% or more). This is the process of If the net increase in number of sheets is 3 or more, a process of inputting 2 to the second offset counter is executed in step S2104.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether the number of increased/decreased coins MY in the advantageous section is twice or more the number of games AG in the advantageous section. In this modification, it is determined whether the net increase in number of coins calculated from the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY and the advantageous section game number AG is 2 or more (whether the ball output rate is 166% or more). This is the process of If the net increase in number of sheets is 2 or more, a process of inputting 1 to the second offset counter is executed in step S2106.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, a process of inputting 0 to the second offset counter is executed in step S2107.

As already explained, the increase/decrease number of coins MY in the advantageous section represents the increase in the number of coins after the number of coins paid out exceeds the number of bets after the shift to the advantageous zone, and the consecutive winning out counter OC is the number of coins increased after the number of coins paid out exceeds the number of bets after the shift to the advantageous zone. For example, an increase in medals that occurs regardless of the AT mode is included in the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY, but is not included in the consecutive winnings out counter OC. Further, the number of games in the advantageous section AG represents the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section, whereas the number of consecutive games counter GC represents the number of games played after the display on the section display started, and the number of games that are played again. This represents the number of games not including winning games. Therefore, the number of games in the advantageous period AG is basically a larger value than the number of consecutive games counter GC. In this case, the net increase in number of medals, which is the increase in the number of medals per game calculated by the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC, is calculated from the number of increased/decreased medals in the advantageous section MY and the number of games in the advantageous section AG. This number is different from the net increase number, which is the number of medals increased or decreased per game, and the former is likely to be larger than the latter. In other words, when inputting the value of the second offset counter based on the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY and the advantageous section game number AG as in this modification, a smaller value is more likely to be input than in the first embodiment. (It becomes easier to be set in a high-income state).

After executing any one of steps S2104, S2106, and S2107, the process advances to step S2108. Steps S2108 to S2110 are similar to the processes of steps S1610 to S1612, and if the situation is close to the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section, 4 is input to the first offset counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S2109, the process advances to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive game games counter GC, but the number of advantageous period games AG, is larger than 500 as a first predetermined number. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, a process of inputting 3 to the first offset counter is executed in step S2112, and then the main ball output adjustment process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S2111, it is determined in step S2113 whether the number of advantageous section games AG is larger than 200 as the second predetermined number, and if it is larger than 200, the first After executing the process of inputting 2 into the offset counter, the main ball output adjustment process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S2113, it is determined in step S2115 whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG is larger than 100 as a third predetermined number, and if it is larger than 100, in step S2116 1 is input into the offset counter, and if it is 100 or less, 0 is input into the first offset counter in step S2117, and then the main ball output adjustment process is ended.

The number of games in the advantageous period AG tends to be a larger value than the number of consecutive games counter GC, but with the above configuration, the first offset counter has a larger value than in the first embodiment. is more likely to be input (it becomes easier to be set to a low consecutive winnings state).

As described above, by setting the information during the advantageous section used to set the consecutive game state as the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the number of increase/decrease tickets in the advantageous zone MY, the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC can be separately set. There is no need to store or measure, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

In addition, by calculating the net increase in number of coins including the games that have been awarded a replay, such as the number of games in the advantageous zone AG, or by setting the value of the first offset counter, the relationship with the number of games actually played becomes clear, making it easier to achieve consistency, and if a state is set in which the probability of winning a replay may differ, such as an RT state, it becomes possible to set the consecutive win state according to that state. Therefore, the consecutive win state can be set in detail while being more in line with the actual game conditions.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the timing of setting the successive winning state (input of each offset counter) is different. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the ball output adjustment process in this modification.

In this modification, in steps S2201 to S2204, processing for updating the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC is performed in the same way as in steps S1601 to S1604 described above. On the other hand, in this modification, after updating the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC, the ball output is adjusted without performing input processing for each offset counter (steps S1605 to S1618). end the process. Therefore, in the second section display process that is activated at the end of each game, only the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC are updated, and the calculation process of the net increase in number of tickets based on these counters is not performed.

On the other hand, in the AT type determination process (FIG. 57) and the ceiling counter setting process (FIG. 58) in this modification, when each process is started, the input process for each offset counter is first performed. (Steps S1605 to S1618) are performed (Steps S2301 and S2401). Thereafter, the type of AT mode and the ceiling counter (ceiling mode) are set based on the continuous play state defined by each offset counter input in step S2301 and step S2401.

In this way, instead of performing the process for calculating the net additional number of coins every game, the process for calculating the number of sheets added is performed at the necessary timing (in the above case, when transitioning to AT mode or when AT mode ends). With this configuration, the number of times the process is executed can be reduced, and the process can be simplified.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, a consecutive consecutive game condition after the current consecutive game condition is predicted, and notification is performed according to the prediction. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the state transition notification process in this modification. The state transition notification process is a process that is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the CPU 181 of the display control device 81.

In step S2501, it is determined whether an offset command has been received from the main controller 101. Although a detailed explanation using figures will be omitted, the main control device 101 outputs an offset command to the display control device 81 every time the ball output adjustment process is performed (each time each offset counter is set). The offset command includes the value of the offset counter set this time, and the current information on the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC. If the offset command has not been received, the state transition notification process is immediately terminated. If an offset command has been received, the process advances to step S2502.

In step S2502, a process is executed to grasp the current consecutive winnings state based on the values of each offset counter included in the received offset command. Note that the display control device 81 side also stores a table similar to the consecutive home status table in the main control device 101, and by comparing the above-mentioned offset counter with this table, it is possible to identify the consecutive home status. be.

In the next step S2503, it is determined whether the streak state determined in step S2502 is a high streak state. If it is a high streak state, in step S2504, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to notify the player of the high streak state. Then, in step S2505, a process is executed to determine whether or not the lottery has been won, and if it has been won, in step S2506, the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that a high streak state notification is made to the effect that the player is in a high streak state. In the high streak state notification, for example, the background color of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed to a color different from the normal color (for example, if the normal color is blue, it is changed to red), or a sound effect different from the normal color is output from the speaker 64.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2503 or step S2505, or after the processing of step S2506 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, a process is executed to grasp the current consecutive out counter OC and consecutive game number counter GC based on the received offset command. Then, if it is determined in step S2508 that the AT mode is not in progress, in step S2509, it is determined whether the consecutive out counter OC is six times or more the consecutive game number counter GC, that is, whether the current ball payout rate is 200% or more and the net increase in the number of coins is three or more. In this case, since 2 is input to the second offset counter, the processing of step S2509 may be performed based on the information of the second offset counter included in the received offset command.

If the current number of net additions is 3 or more, the process advances to step S2510, where a predetermined number of games (30 games) is added to the current consecutive games out counter GC, and a predetermined number of games is added to the current consecutive games out counter OC. It is determined whether or not the net increase in number of sheets is less than three when the expected increase or decrease in the number of sheets when used in the AT mode is added. In other words, a value obtained by multiplying a predetermined number by the expected net increase in number of coins in non-AT mode (minus approximately 2.10 coins) is added to the current consecutive game out counter OC, and that value is set to the consecutive game number counter GC. It is determined whether the value is less than 6 times the sum of the numbers. In this process, if a predetermined number of games are played in non-AT mode from the current games, excluding games that result in replay winnings, the value input to the second offset counter changes from 2 to 1 or 0. This is a process to determine whether or not the information can be obtained. If the value input to the second offset counter is likely to decrease, in step S2511, the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the first state transition notification is performed, and then the state transition notification process is ended. do.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the first state transition notification is, for example, displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as "30 more games to improve state!?", suggesting that if no transition to the AT mode occurs over the specified number of 30 games, the winning streak state may transition to a high winning streak state. In other words, the first state transition notification suggests that the possibility of an advantageous AT mode type being selected is increased in the AT type determination process that is performed when transitioning to the AT mode.

In this way, in the advantageous zone, when the player is not in AT mode and the number of medals held may decrease, the player would normally play in the hope of an early transition to AT mode. However, by notifying the first state transition as described above, it is possible to make the player expect the transition to AT mode to occur later, i.e., after the notified number of games has been played.

If it is determined in step S2509 that the current net increase is not 3 or more, then in step S2512 it is determined whether the current consecutive out counter OC is 5 times or more the consecutive game count counter GC, i.e., whether the current payout rate is 166% or more and less than 200% and the net increase is 2 or more and less than 3. In this case, since 1 is input to the second offset counter, the processing of step S2512 may be performed based on the information of the second offset counter included in the offset command received above.

If the current net increase number is 2 or more and less than 3, the process advances to step S2513, where the predetermined number of games (30 games) is added to the current consecutive games out counter GC, and the predetermined number of games is added to the current consecutive games out counter OC. When adding the expected increase/decrease in the number of sheets when consumed in the non-AT mode, it is determined whether the net increase in the number of sheets is less than 2 sheets. In other words, a value obtained by multiplying a predetermined number by the expected net increase in number of coins in non-AT mode (minus approximately 2.10 coins) is added to the current consecutive game out counter OC, and that value is set to the consecutive game number counter GC. It is determined whether or not the value is less than five times the sum of the numbers. This process corresponds to the process of step S2510 above, and when a predetermined number of games from the current games, excluding games that result in replay winnings, are played in non-AT mode, input is input to the second offset counter. This is a process of determining whether the value to be changed can change from 1 to 0. If the value input to the second offset counter is likely to decrease, in step S2511, the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the first state transition notification is performed, and then the state transition notification process is ended. do.

If a negative determination is made in any one of step S2510, step S2512, and step S2513, the state transition notification process is directly ended. Note that once the first state transition notification is started, the first state transition notification continues until a transition to AT mode occurs or a predetermined number of games are played without transition to AT mode. It is better to make it . In this case, in the first state transition notification to be continued, it is preferable to update the display of the number of remaining games to decrease in accordance with the progress of the game for each game. If a transition to AT mode occurs, the first state transition notification is terminated, and if a predetermined number of games are played without transition to AT mode, the value of the second offset counter changes. It would be a good idea to notify people of this possibility. Note that it may be configured to notify that the value of the second offset counter has changed (success notification), or may not be notified if it has not changed, or it may be configured to provide a different notification (failure notification). . Further, in step S2511, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the first state transition notification, and when the execution lottery is won, the first state transition notification may be executed. Furthermore, the trigger for starting the first state transition notification can be set, for example, when a predetermined game result is achieved, when the number of games after the end of the AT mode reaches a predetermined number, or when a transition to a consecutive game state occurs. , when the value of each offset counter changes.

If it is determined in step S2508 that the AT mode is in effect, the process advances to step S2514. In step S2514, whether or not the consecutive game out counter OC is less than 6 times the consecutive game number counter GC, that is, whether the current ball output rate is less than 200% and the net increase in number of coins is less than 3 coins. Determine. If the net increase in number of coins is less than 3, it is determined in step S2515 whether the consecutive game out counter OC is less than 5 times the consecutive game number counter GC, that is, the current ball output rate is less than 166%. It is determined whether the net increase in number of sheets is less than 2 sheets. Note that in these processes as well, determinations may be made based on the information of the second offset counter.

If the current net increase number of tickets is less than 2 in step S2515, the process advances to step S2516, and if the predetermined number (40 tickets) is added to the current consecutive play out counter OC, the net increase number will be 2 or more. Determine whether or not. In other words, the value obtained by adding the predetermined number of coins to the current consecutive game out counter OC is the average number of games required for the predetermined number of coins to be paid out (40 coins ÷ about 8 coins, which is the average net increase in the number of coins in AT mode = 5 games). It is determined whether the value is 5 times or more the value added to the consecutive games counter GC. This process is a process for determining whether or not the value input to the second offset counter can change from 0 to 1 or 2 when a predetermined number of coins are paid out according to press order notification etc. in the current AT mode. It is. If the value input to the second offset counter is likely to increase, in step S2517, the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the second state transition notification is performed, and then the state transition notification process is ended. do.

The second state transition notification is, for example, as shown in FIG. 60(b), on the auxiliary display section 65, when a predetermined number of 40 coins are paid out, such as "Get 40 coins and the status is down!?" By doing so, an effect is performed that suggests that the consecutive winnings state may shift to a low consecutive winnings state. That is, the second state transition notification suggests that there is a possibility that an unfavorable ceiling mode will be selected in the ceiling counter setting process when the AT mode ends.

In this way, when the player is in the AT mode in an advantageous section and the number of medals they have can increase, normally the player plays the game with the expectation of acquiring as many medals as possible, and especially In the AT mode like this embodiment where the upper limit number of payout coins is determined, the game is played with the expectation of reaching the upper limit number of payout coins in as few games as possible, but as described above, the second state transition notification By doing this, it is possible to make it possible to expect that medal payout will not occur as much as possible in the AT mode, that is, the payout will take place as many games as possible compared to the notified number of medals.

By the way, as already explained, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated according to the push order notification that is made when the push order bell is won, the small winnings 1 to 6 with 13 medals paid out will be achieved, but when the push order bell is won, If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation order different from the regular notification, small winning combinations 9 to 32, which generate one medal payout, may be won, or they may be missed and no medal payout may occur. Therefore, in the case where the second state transition notification is performed as described above, in order to prevent the consecutive hits state from transitioning to the low consecutive hits state side, in AT mode, an operation order different from the press order notification is required. It is conceivable to operate stop switches 42 to 44. In the above case, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which results in winning 9 small winnings to winning 32 small winnings, may be configured to be notified as a pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65. In this case, the press order notification on the instruction monitor 68 (notification of the operation order corresponding to the small role winning 1 to the small role winning 6) and the press order notification presentation on the auxiliary display section 65 (corresponding to the small role winning 9 winning to the small winning winning 32 winning) (notification of the order of operations to be performed) will be different.

If the current net increase is 2 or more but less than 3 in step S2515, proceed to step S2518 and determine whether the net increase will be 3 or more when a predetermined number (40) is added to the current consecutive out counter OC. In other words, determine whether the value obtained by adding the predetermined number to the current consecutive out counter OC is 6 times or more the value obtained by adding the average number of games required to generate a payout of a predetermined number (40 ÷ approximately 8 = 5 games, which is the average net increase in AT mode) to the consecutive game number counter GC. This process is a process for determining whether the value input to the second offset counter can change from 1 to 2 when a payout of a predetermined number occurs according to the push order notification in the current AT mode. If the value input to the second offset counter can increase, in step S2517, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that a second state transition notification is performed, and then the state transition notification process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in any one of step S2514, step S2516, and step S2518, the state transition notification process is directly ended. Once the second state transition notification is started, the second state transition notification will continue until the AT mode ends or a predetermined number of payouts occur before the AT mode ends. It is a good idea to do so. In this case, in the second state transition notification to be continued, it is preferable to update the display of the remaining number of payout medals to decrease in accordance with the number of medals to be paid out each time a medal payout occurs. When the AT mode ends, the second state transition notification ends, and if a predetermined number of medals are paid out before the AT mode ends, the value of the second offset counter changes. It is a good idea to notify the public that this may have happened. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which notification is made that the value of the second offset counter has changed (in this case, it is a failure notification, which is the opposite of the first state transition notification), and if there is no change, the notification is not made. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a different notification (success notification) is made. Alternatively, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to execute the second state transition notification in step S2517, and if the lottery is won, the second state transition notification may be executed. Furthermore, the trigger for starting the second state transition notification can be set, for example, when a predetermined game result is achieved, when the number of paid out coins after shifting to AT mode reaches a predetermined number, or when a change in the consecutive winning state occurs. , when the value of each offset counter changes.

By doing the above, using the consecutive game state defined by the net increase in number of tickets calculated by the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game game number counter GC, the consecutive game state can be changed or not changed. It becomes possible to have fun.

In particular, during the AT mode, the player is not allowed to intervene in whether or not the consecutive win state will continue, such as by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order or in a different order. is possible. By doing this, even if the actual number of medals paid out during the AT mode is small, the consecutive winnings state is maintained on the high consecutive winnings state side at the end of the AT mode, which is advantageous in the setting process of the ceiling counter. A game feature in which a ceiling mode is set is realized, and a novel game feature never seen before can be provided.

In addition, in the above-mentioned FIG. 59, in the situation where the AT mode is not in progress, in the process of predicting the net increase in the number of coins after a predetermined number of games (step S2510 and step S2513), a uniform number of games (30) is used for the prediction. However, the number of net increase after the number of games to be predicted may be changed depending on the situation to be predicted. For example, the value of the ceiling counter set on the main control device 101 side can be grasped on the display control device 81 side by sending and receiving commands, etc., and the number of games until the current value of the ceiling counter becomes 0 can be predicted. This configuration may also be used. That is, in the AT mode lottery process, when the AT mode is won because the ceiling counter becomes 0 instead of winning the AT mode, the net increase in the number of coins at the time of winning the AT mode may be predicted.

In addition, in FIG. 59 above, in a certain situation during the AT mode, in the process of predicting the net increase in the number of coins after a predetermined number of coins are paid out (step S2516 and step S2518), a uniform number of coins (40) is used for the prediction. However, the number of coins to be paid out after which the net increase in the number of coins to be predicted may be varied depending on the situation to be predicted. For example, the value of the remaining number of payouts (AT counter) in AT mode set on the main controller 101 side can be grasped on the display control device 81 side by sending and receiving commands, etc., until the current number of remaining payouts becomes 0. The number of sheets may be used for the prediction.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the information on the consecutive win state set during the AT mode is carried over even after the end of the advantageous zone. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the initialization process for the consecutive win state information in this embodiment. The initialization process for the consecutive win state information is one of the processes of step S1410 in the second zone display process (FIG. 40). In other words, the initialization process for the consecutive win state information is performed as one of the initialization processes when the advantageous zone ends and becomes a normal zone.

In step S2601, it is determined whether the first offset counter is 4 or not. As already explained, the case where the first offset counter is 4 is a situation close to the forced termination condition (number of games in the advantageous section AG≧1300 or number of increase/decrease tickets in the advantageous section MY≧2000). If the first offset counter is between 0 and 3, the process advances to step S2602 to initialize the first offset counter to 0. Then, in step S2603, the second offset counter is initialized to 0, and then the initialization process of the consecutive winning state information is ended.

The case where it is determined that the first offset counter is 4 in step S2601 is not only the case where the forced termination condition is reached, but also the case where the ceiling mode is set as the normal mode due to being set to a low consecutive hit state, which is advantageous. A case can be considered where the section continuation counter becomes 0. In this case, in step S2604, it is determined whether the second offset counter is 0 or not. The case where the second offset counter is 0 means that the net increase in the number of medals calculated by the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC is less than 2, and a very rapid increase in medals does not occur in the advantageous section. It shows that there is no. If the second offset counter is 0 in step S2604, in step S2605, the current value of the consecutive game number counter GC and the current value of the consecutive game out counter OC are stored in the non-initial value stored in the RAM 106. Execute the process to store in the storage area. The non-initialized area is an area that is not subject to the initialization process of the advantageous section, and is an area in which at least the value of the consecutive game number counter GC and the value of the consecutive game out counter OC can be stored separately. be. After that, in step S2606, a process of inputting 100 into the memory holding counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed, and then, in steps S2602 and S2603, initialization process of each offset counter is executed, and then, This initialization process ends.

Note that the memory retention counter is also a counter that is not subject to initialization processing at the end of the advantageous period. However, since the situation in which the memory retention counter is used is a normal interval rather than an advantageous interval, instead of setting the memory retention counter in a non-initialized area that is not subject to initialization processing, it is intentionally set in a normal interval. By setting in the area (various counter areas 106e), it is possible to suppress the amount of information stored in the non-initialized area. This makes it possible to easily check the information set during the advantageous section and carried over to the normal section.

As described above, when the forced termination condition is soon satisfied, 4 is input to the first offset counter, and the advantageous section ends based on, for example, the normal mode being selected as the ceiling mode, the consecutive game game The information of the number counter GC and consecutive outs counter OC is stored and held in the non-initialized area, so that it is carried over even after the advantageous section ends.

FIG. 62 shows a memory retention process executed by the main control device 101 in this embodiment as processing for the information of the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC that are taken over after the above-mentioned advantageous period ends. It is a flowchart. The memory retention process is a process that is activated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 for each game, and is, for example, a process that is executed every time the second section display process is activated at the end of a game.

In step S2701, it is determined whether the vehicle is in an advantageous section. If the advantageous section flag is not set and the section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, it is determined in step S2702 whether or not the above-mentioned memory holding counter is greater than 0. That is, the process of step S2702 is a process of determining whether the number of games is within a predetermined number of games after the end of the advantageous period.

If the memory retention counter is greater than 0 in step S2702, a process of subtracting 1 from the memory retention counter is executed in step S2703. Then, in step S2704, it is determined whether or not the memory retention counter has become 0. If it has become 0, in step S2705, the consecutive game number counter GC stored in the non-initialized area is After initializing the information and the information on the consecutive game out counter OC (processing to clear it to 0), this memory holding process ends. If a negative determination is made in either step S2702 or step S2704, the memory retention process is immediately terminated. That is, as mentioned above, at the end of the advantageous period, the information of the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC, whose memory is carried over under predetermined conditions, is carried over for a predetermined number of games of 100 games. , after 100 games, the information is initialized.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the vehicle is in the advantageous section, the process advances to step S2707, and it is determined whether the memory retention counter is greater than 0 or not. If it is 0, the memory retention process is immediately terminated, and if it is greater than 0, the memory retention counter is initialized (cleared to 0) in step S2707, and then This memory retention process ends.

Although detailed explanation with figures is omitted, in the ball output adjustment process in this embodiment, when updating the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC in step S1603 and step S1604, the non-initialized area is It is determined whether or not the information of the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC is stored, and if it is stored, the information stored in the non-initialized area is read out and the consecutive game out is executed. After inputting the information to the counter OC and consecutive games counter GC, each counter is updated based on the information of the current game. In addition, after reading out the information of consecutive game out counter OC and consecutive game number counter from the non-initialized area as described above, the information of each counter stored in the non-initialized area is initialized. processing. That is, by updating the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC based on the information of the non-initialized area at the time of the first update, it becomes possible to update each counter across advantageous sections.

As described above, in this embodiment, the information on the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC may be stored and held for a predetermined number of games after the advantageous period ends. If the game shifts to the advantageous section again within the predetermined number of games, the information of the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC is taken over and used for setting the consecutive game state. In this way, by making it possible to carry over the information used to set the consecutive winning state across advantageous sections, the ball output can be adjusted based on the net increase in the number of balls (ball output rate) regardless of the continuity of advantageous sections. becomes possible.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section are about to be met and the advantageous section ends due to the ceiling mode being set to the normal mode, this is used to set the consecutive winning state. This makes it possible to transfer the information that is provided. In this slot machine 10, the ball output is adjusted by the ball output adjustment process, and in particular, as the consecutive game number counter GC increases, the consecutive game state is more likely to be set to the low consecutive game state. Therefore, in a situation where the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section are soon met as described above, and the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1300 or more, the consecutive winnings state may be set to a low consecutive winnings state. Highly sexual. Then, for example, it is assumed that the advantageous section continues due to successive winnings in the 1st AT mode instead of the 2nd AT mode, and the net increase in the number of tickets in this case is not so large (the 2nd offset counter is 0). ) is assumed. Therefore, by inheriting the information for consecutive games as described above, the number of games in the advantageous section can be reset, and the net increase in the number of tickets is not that large (the second offset counter is 0). ), and it is possible to eliminate the situation where the consecutive winning state is set to a low consecutive winning state due to approaching the maximum number of games in the advantageous section. becomes.

<Fourth embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the continuous game state is set using the net increase in the number of coins calculated based on the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC, and the AT type is adjusted as the ball output adjustment based on the consecutive game state. Although the configuration for setting the ceiling counter and the ceiling counter has been described, the ball output adjustment based on the consecutive winning state may be performed using other configurations. In this embodiment, as a ball payout adjustment based on the winning streak state, the number of games in the precursor mode when the AT mode is won is varied.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in this embodiment.

The AT lottery process in this embodiment differs from the AT lottery process in each of the above embodiments in the process when the AT mode is won. That is, in FIG. 63, the processes from step S2801 to step S2807 and from step S2811 to step S2826 are the same as the processes from step S801 to step S807 and step S810 to step S825 described above. Then, it is determined in step S2806 that the AT mode lottery has been won, and as a result of the process after setting the ceiling counter to 0 in step S2807 or the process of subtracting the ceiling counter in step S2815, the ceiling counter becomes 0. In this case, the processing in steps S2808 to S2810 is different.

In each of the above embodiments, in these cases, the AT mode winning flag is set (step S808), the portent mode is set to 0 games, the portent flag is set, and the portent command is output to the display control device 81. (step S809). On the other hand, in this embodiment, in step S2808, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed, and in step S2809, the lottery result of step S2808 is input to the portent counter, and in step S2810, the portent flag is set. At the same time, a precursor command including the number of precursor games is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is ended.

In the lottery process for the number of portent games in step S2808, the table for the number of portent games is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and the current number of portent games is determined after understanding the current consecutive winning state. As shown in FIG. 64, the precursor game number table is set so that the number of precursor games differs depending on the lottery result that triggered the winning of the current AT mode shift lottery and the current consecutive winning state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, as the number of precursor games, one case is selected from 0 games to 8 games, one case is selected from 9 games to 16 games, and 17 games are selected. It is set so that any one of the 32 games may be selected. In the following description, games 0 to 8 will be referred to as short omen mode, games 9 to 16 will be referred to as medium omen mode, and games 17 to 32 will be referred to as long omen mode. If you win the AT mode shift lottery using Normal Rep A, Normal Rep B, and Normal Rep C, if you are in a low consecutive winning state, short omen mode will not be selected, and medium omen mode will be 10%, The long omen mode was selected at 90% of the time, and the number of long omen games was more likely to be selected. On the other hand, even if you win the AT mode transition lottery using the same normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C as triggers, if you are in a high-rent state, you will be able to enter the short omen mode, medium omen mode, long omen mode. The precursor modes are selected at 30%, 40%, and 30%, respectively, and the short precursor mode is more likely to be selected than the low consecutive hit state.

Also, depending on the game result of winning the AT mode transition lottery, the length of the precursor mode may differ even in the same consecutive game state. For example, if you win on chance A or B, and when you win on chance When compared with the case where the player wins on chance number C, the setting is such that the short omen mode is more likely to be selected when the player wins on chance number C. Furthermore, for example, if the AT mode transition lottery is won using Cherry C as a trigger, the short omen mode is set to be selected regardless of the level of the consecutive winning state.

Incidentally, if the ceiling counter is set to 0 by the ceiling counter subtraction process without winning the AT mode transition lottery, 0 games are selected as the number of precursor games in step S2808, regardless of the level of the consecutive winning state. It is set to be

Although detailed explanation using figures will be omitted, in the game count management process (FIG. 38) in this embodiment, when the premonition flag is cleared in step S1209, a process of setting the AT mode winning flag is performed. As a result, when the premonition game count becomes 0, the AT mode winning flag is set, and a positive judgment can be made in step S607 of the lottery result response process (FIG. 27) in a game in which normal lip B or normal lip C for starting the AT mode is won.

In this case, because the number of precursor games differs, the number of games until AT mode starts after winning the AT mode transition lottery changes, and if the number of precursor games becomes longer, the start of AT mode will be delayed, and the precursor will change. The shorter the number of games, the earlier the AT mode starts. In other words, if you win an AT mode where you can expect to win medals due to press order notifications, by adjusting the number of games until the transition to AT mode where the press order notification occurs, the time between winning and transition is It becomes possible to change the number of medals reduced in the game. Even in this case, it is possible to eliminate the phenomenon in which the ball output rate (net increase in number of coins) becomes too high or too low.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, a modification regarding the AT mode ceiling will be described.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing lottery result corresponding processing in the first modification regarding the ceiling in AT mode.

In this embodiment, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether the above-mentioned ceiling counter is 0 or not. As already explained, a predetermined value is input to the ceiling counter in the AT ceiling setting process when winning the advantageous section transition lottery and in the ceiling counter setting process when the AT mode ends. If it is determined in step S2901 that the value is not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counter is executed in step S2902. Then, when the ceiling counter is 0 in step S2901, or after executing the process in step S2902, in steps S2903 to S2910, a lottery is drawn to move to an advantageous section in the processes in steps S601 to S608 explained above. , processing for AT mode, and processing for press order notification.

In this case, in each of the above embodiments, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter was configured to be performed in the AT lottery process, but since it is performed in step S2902 as described above, the AT lottery process in this modification is In step S2906, the ceiling counter is not subtracted.

That is, in each of the above embodiments, the count until the ceiling counter reaches 0 (the process of subtracting the ceiling counter) is performed during an advantageous section, but in this modification, it is performed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or not. It is structured as follows. By doing this, when the number of games played after the end of AT mode, including the games after the end of the advantageous period (games during the normal period), reaches the number of games entered in the ceiling counter, the AT mode is activated. You will be able to move to

However, even if the ceiling counter reaches 0, the AT mode winning flag is set during the advantageous section (it is done within the AT lottery process), so the ceiling counter will be set during the normal section. If it becomes 0, that state will be maintained until it shifts to the advantageous section, and the AT mode winning flag will be set when it shifts to the advantageous section.

Next, a second modification regarding the AT mode ceiling will be described. In this modification, the value input to the advantageous section continuation counter is different from those in the above embodiments. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section transition lottery process in this modification, and FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a ceiling counter setting process in this modification.

In the advantageous section transfer lottery process in this modification, in steps S3001 to S3008, the same processes as steps S701 to S708 described above are performed. Then, in step S3009, the value input to the ceiling counter in step S3008 is input into the advantageous section continuation counter.

In the ceiling counter setting process in this modification, steps S3101 to S3109 perform the same processes as steps S1801 to S1809. Then, in step S3110, the value input to the ceiling counter in step S3109 is input into the advantageous section continuation counter.

That is, in this modification, for example, if 999 is input to the ceiling counter and the ceiling is set as the maximum ceiling, the advantageous section continues until the maximum ceiling is reached. In other words, since the advantageous period continues at least until the games input to the ceiling counter are played, the player can It becomes easier to predict and grasp the number of ceiling games, and it becomes possible to suitably realize gaming features such as reaching the ceiling number of games and selecting a game machine with the aim of reaching the ceiling number of games.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the process for inputting the second offset counter in the ball output adjustment process is different from each of the above embodiments. FIG. 68 shows a part of the flowchart of the ball output adjustment process in this embodiment.

Steps S3201 and S3202 are processes for determining whether or not it is the timing to execute ball output adjustment, and similarly to each of the above embodiments, when the section display is displayed and the game is not a replay result, The ball output will be adjusted accordingly. Then, in steps S3203 and S3204, the consecutive game out counter OC and the consecutive game number counter GC are updated as in each of the above embodiments.

In step S3205, it is determined whether the calculated number of games SG provided in the various counter areas 106e has reached a predetermined number. In this embodiment, the configuration for calculating the ball output rate and the net increase in the number of coins is configured to calculate the ball output rate and the net increase in the number of coins for a predetermined number of games, and the predetermined number determined in step S3205 is This corresponds to the predetermined number of games for calculating the rate and the number of net increases (400 in this embodiment). If the calculated number of games SG has not reached the predetermined number, a process of adding 1 to the calculated number of games SG is performed in step S3206.

After executing the process in step S3206, in step S3207, a process is executed to add the number of payouts in the current game to the calculation out counter SOC corresponding to the calculation counter K provided in the various counter areas 106e. Calculation out counters SOC are provided in the various counter areas 106e for the predetermined number of games mentioned above (400 pieces), and include a first calculation out counter SOC1, a second calculation out counter SOC2, . . . 400th calculation out counter SOC2, . The CPU 102 is able to grasp each of them individually, such as the out counter SOC400. For example, if 4 is input to the calculation counter K, the fourth calculation out counter SOC4 is A process of adding up the number of payouts is performed, and if 400 is input to the calculation counter K, a process of adding the number of payouts of the current game to the 400th calculation out counter SOC400 is performed. Although the calculation counter K is a loop counter that can be updated from 1 to a predetermined number (400), in this embodiment, it is configured to loop with the same value as the calculation number of games SG as the upper limit.

After executing the process of step S3207, a process of adding 1 to the calculation game number counter SGC corresponding to the calculation counter K is executed in step S3208. Calculation game number counters SGC are also provided in the various counter areas 106e for the predetermined number of games mentioned above (400 pieces), including a first calculation game number counter SGC1, a second calculation game number counter SGC2, . 400 calculation game number counter SGC400, the CPU 102 can grasp each of them individually. For example, when 4 is input to the calculation counter K, the fourth calculation game number counter SGC4 If 400 is input to the calculation counter K, a process of adding 1 to the 400th calculation game number counter SGC400 is executed.

In the following step S3209, a process is executed to calculate the payout rate (net increase in number of coins) using the calculation out counter SOC updated in step S3207 and the calculation game number counter SGC updated in step S3208. The calculated payout rate is stored in RAM 106 as a payout rate counter DK. The payout rate counters DK are also provided in the various counter areas 106e for the above-mentioned predetermined number of games (400), and the CPU 102 can grasp each of them individually, such as the first payout rate DK1, the second payout rate DK2, ..., the 400th payout rate DK400, etc.

Thereafter, in step S3210, 1 is added to the calculation counter K, and in step S3211, it is determined whether the calculation counter K has become equal to the calculation number of games SG. If a negative determination is made in step S3211, the process returns to step S3207, where the calculation out counter SOC and the calculation game number counter SGC corresponding to the calculation counter K updated in step S3210 are updated, and the calculation out counter SOC and calculation game number counter SGC are updated. The ball payout rate DK is calculated based on the counter SOC and the calculation game number counter SGC. Then, when the calculation counter K becomes equal to the calculation game number SG, an affirmative determination is made in step S3211, the process proceeds to step S3212, and a process of inputting 1 to the calculation counter K is executed. As a result, in the ball output adjustment process for the next game, the calculation counter K is set to 1 again in step S3207, and the calculation out counter SOC is updated.

That is, in this embodiment, in the ball output adjustment process, the ball output rate DK is calculated with a predetermined number as the upper limit for the number of games since the ball output adjustment was started. For example, in the first game after the ball output adjustment was started, the first calculation out counter SOC1 and the first calculation game number counter SGC1 calculate the first ball output rate DK1, and in the second game after the ball output adjustment was started, the first calculation out counter SOC1 and the first calculation game number counter SGC1 calculate the first ball output rate DK1, which have been updated since the first game, and the second calculation out counter SOC2 and the second calculation game number counter SGC2 calculate the second ball output rate DK2, which have been updated since the second game.

If the number of games for calculation SG is 400 in step S3205, a process of clearing the out counter for calculation SOC and the number of games for calculation counter SGC with the oldest update start is executed in step S3213. Thereafter, the process advances to step S3207, where processing for updating the calculation out counter SOC and the calculation game number counter SGC is performed. Therefore, after the 400th game after the start of ball output adjustment, 400 ball output rates DK are calculated by 400 sets of calculation out counter SOC and calculation game number counter SGC. These 400 sets of calculation out counters SOC and calculation game number counters SGC each have different update start games by one game, and different values can be calculated for each of the 400 ball output rates DK.

In step S3214, it is determined whether any of the above ball output rates DK is 6 or more, that is, the output calculated by the set of any calculation out counter SOC and calculation game number counter SGC. It is determined whether the ball rate is 200% or more. In other words, from the viewpoint of the game for which the ball output adjustment is started, it is determined whether the ball output rate is less than 200% no matter which game the update is started from in the set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3214 and any of the ball payout rates DK is 6 or more, a process of inputting 2 into the second offset counter is executed in step S3215.

If it is determined in step S3214 that the ball output rate DK of any set is less than 6, then in step S3216 it is determined whether any of the ball output rates DK is 5 or more, that is, which one of the ball output rates DK is less than 6. It is determined whether the ball payout rate calculated by the set of the calculation out counter SOC and the calculation game number counter SGC is 166% or more and less than 200%. In other words, from the viewpoint of the game for which the ball output adjustment is started, it is determined whether the ball output rate is less than 166% no matter which game the update is started from in the set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3216 and any of the ball payout rates DK is 5 or more, a process of inputting 1 to the second offset counter is executed in step S3217. If any ball output rate DK is less than 5, the ball output rate will be less than 166% no matter which game the update is started from, considering the game for which the ball output adjustment is started. If so, in step S3218, a process of inputting 0 to the second offset counter is executed.

After executing any one of steps S3215, S3217, and S3218, the process advances to step S1610, and the first offset counter is set. The setting of the first offset counter is as described above.

As described above, the configuration is such that the ball output rate (net increase in number of coins) is calculated over 400 games as a predetermined number of games, and the game in which the calculation starts is shifted by one game to increase the ball output rate to 400 balls. By adopting a configuration that calculates the rate, for example, the ball payout rate may be low due to a situation in which there are consecutive games in which the result is a winning result, or games in which the winning order of the push button happens to be a successive game. To prevent the occurrence of an event in which the consecutive winnings state is set to a higher or lower consecutive winnings state than expected due to the ball winning rate increasing due to the situation where the winnings occur. be able to.

Here, regulations for gaming machines may require that the ball output rate during a predetermined number of games be less than a predetermined number, and each of the above inventions conforms to the regulations for such gaming machines. It can also be applied to determine the ball payout rate. In other words, even if the design stage is designed so that the ball payout rate during a predetermined number of games is less than the above-mentioned specified number, during testing, the ball payout rate may be different from the designed value due to, for example, successive push-order bell wins. The above-mentioned inventions are also effective means for solving such a situation where the ball output rate differs from the designed value.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments and each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments and each modification. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modified examples, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) Each of the above embodiments has been described on the premise that the second BB is won in a 2-bet game, and the carryover state of the second BB is played in a 3-bet game without winning the second BB. Bonuses that are carried over are not limited to those mentioned above, and for example, a configuration in which the first BB is won in a 3-bet game, and the carried-over state of the first BB is played in a 2-bet game without winning the first BB. You can also use it as Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a carryover state of a bonus that can be won in a 1-bet game is played in a 3-bet game. In this case, by making the bonus that can be won in the 1-bet game impossible to win in the 3-bet game, the carryover state of the bonus that can be won in the 1-bet game can be easily continued in the 3-bet game. can do. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the bonus winning information (winning flag) carried over is not deleted even if the power is turned on/off or the winning probability is changed (settings changed).

In addition, it is possible to win the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, but it is not possible to win the 2nd BB, and furthermore, it is possible to win the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, but it is not possible to win the 2nd BB, and it is not possible to win the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game. The explanation has been made assuming a configuration in which it is possible to win and the first BB cannot be won, and furthermore, in a 2-bet game, it is possible to win the second BB but it is not possible to win the first BB, but the above bet game in which it is possible to win each BB The bet games in which each BB can win a prize are not limited to the above ones. For example, in a configuration where the second BB is allowed to win in a 2-bet game, and the carryover state of the 2nd BB is played in a 3-bet game without making the 2nd BB win, the 2nd BB may also be able to win in the 3-bet game. In this configuration, the above-described gameplay continues until the 2nd BB winning is achieved, and after the 2nd BB state based on the 2nd BB winning is exhausted, the 2nd BB is won again in the 2-bet game. It may also be a configuration.

(2) Each of the above embodiments has been described on the premise that a so-called RT state (replay time state) is not provided as a game state in which the winning probability of a replay result changes, but a game in which an RT state is provided It can also be used as a gender. In this case, a configuration may be provided in which there are multiple RT states with different probabilities of replay results and types of replay results that can be won, and an AT mode in which press order notification occurs when the press order bell is won. The AT mode may be realized in one RT state, or the AT mode may be realized in a plurality of RT states. In these cases, in the configuration in which the net increase in number of coins (ball output rate) is calculated using the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC, by not including information on games that result in replays, RT It is possible to prevent a change in the winning probability of a replay result based on a state transition from affecting the net increase in the number of coins.

(3) When updating the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC, information about games that result in replays is not included, but information about games that result in other play results is not included. Alternatively, the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC may be updated based on information on games that result in some predetermined game results. For example, information on games that result in a losing result may not be included, or information on replay results and games that result in a losing result may not be included. In addition, the push order bell is set as a predetermined part of the game result, and the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC are updated based on the information of the game in which any of the press order bells is won. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done.

Furthermore, although the game results that are not to be updated are common to the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC, it is also possible not to update them with different game results. For example, the consecutive game number counter GC is updated in games that result in replays, while the consecutive game out counter OC is not updated in games that result in replays, or the consecutive game number counter GC is updated in games that result in replays. It is not updated in games that result in a first bell, and is not updated in games that result in a replay, while the consecutive game out counter OC is updated in games that result in a push order bell, and in games that result in a replay. In this case, the configuration may be configured to perform updating.

(4) When updating the consecutive game out counter OC, the number of payouts in the current game was added. However, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets in the current game from the number of payouts in the current game is added to the consecutive game out counter OC. It may be configured to add up, or it may be configured to have a counter that adds a value that does not subtract the number of bets from the number of payouts, and a counter that adds a value that subtracts the number of bets from the number of payouts, respectively.

(5) In the ball output adjustment process, after calculating the net increase in the number of coins (ball output rate) based on the consecutive game number counter GC, consecutive game out counter OC, the number of advantageous area games AG, and the number of increased/decreased coins in the advantageous area MY, At the same time as setting the value of the second offset counter, the value of the first offset counter is set based on the consecutive game number counter GC, the number of advantageous zone games AG, etc., and the value of each offset counter and the consecutive game state table are set. The CPU 102 is configured to be able to grasp the current consecutive winnings state by comparing the results, but in the process for adjusting the ball output, the value of each offset counter is set and the current consecutive winnings status table is referenced to determine the current consecutive winnings state. A configuration may also be adopted in which the state is specified and the consecutive play state is stored in the RAM 106 or the like. In this case, for example, if it is specified that the state is in a high-rental home state, the high-value home state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d, and if it is specified that the state is in a middle-class state, the medium-based state flag is stored. If it is determined that the player is in a low consecutive winnings state, the low consecutive winnings state flag is stored, and when storing each of these consecutive winnings state flags, other consecutive winnings state flags are cleared. By doing so, in subsequent processing, the CPU 102 can identify the current consecutive game status by checking which consecutive game status flag is set.

In addition, in the ball output adjustment process, after updating the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC, the net increase in the number of coins (ball output rate) based on each of these counters is calculated, and the net increase The number of sheets may be stored in the RAM 106 or the like. In this case, in the subsequent processing, the value to be set in each offset counter may be specified based on the net increase in number of tickets, the current consecutive game number counter GC, etc., and the consecutive game status can be grasped based on that. good.

(6) Although one type of consecutive winning state table is defined based on each set offset counter, a plurality of types may be provided. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which different successive winning state tables are referred to depending on the number of games executed on the same day or multiple days (after RAM is cleared), or depending on the values of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter, etc. A configuration may also be adopted in which different consecutive winning state tables are referred to. In the case of a configuration in which the consecutive game status table to be referred to differs depending on the number of executed games on the day or after RAM is cleared, the consecutive game status table is set such that the fewer the number of executed games is, the more likely it is to be set to a high consecutive game status, and the number of executed games is changed. If the number increases, the continuous play state table may be set such that the low continuous play state is likely to be set. In addition, in a configuration in which the successive winning state table to be referred to differs depending on the value of each winning ratio counter, for example, the larger the value of the first winning ratio counter that counts the number of games in which the AT mode flag is not set, the more , or the higher the ratio of the first role ratio counter to the second role ratio counter, the more likely it is to be set to a high consecutive winnings state. The table may be configured such that the smaller the ratio of the counter, the easier it is to be set to the low consecutive play state.

Further, the consecutive game status table to be referred to may be changed depending on the process of changing the ball payout performance with reference to the consecutive game status. For example, the consecutive game status table referred to in the AT type determination process and the consecutive game status table referred to in the ceiling counter setting process may be different, and the consecutive game status table referred to in the lottery process for the number of portent games. The tables may be different.

(7) The process of changing the ball output performance using the ball output information based on the consecutive games number counter GC, consecutive games out counter OC, etc. includes AT type determination processing, ceiling counter setting processing, The process is not limited to a lottery process or the like, and may be other processes.

For example, in the stock lottery in the AT consecutive game process, the winning probability, the number of stocks at the time of winning, and the game result that triggers the lottery may be changed by using the ball payout information based on the above-mentioned respective counters. For example, when using the above ball output information to change the winning probability of a stock lottery, even if the ball output information indicates a high consecutive game condition (the net number of additional coins is small, the consecutive game number counter GC is a small value, etc.) For example, it will be easier to win the stock lottery, and if it indicates a low consecutive winnings state (a large number of net additions, a large value of the consecutive games counter GC, a forced end of an advantageous section, etc.), it will be difficult to win the stock lottery. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

Furthermore, for example, the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery or the number of consecutive games in the CZ mode may be changed using the ball output information, and if the ball output information indicates the high consecutive winning state, Increase the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery, increase the number of consecutive games of CZ mode, and if the ball output information indicates the above-mentioned low consecutive winnings state, lower the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery, A configuration may also be adopted in which the number of consecutive games in CZ mode is reduced.

Furthermore, it may be configured to use the above ball payout information to change the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery or the game result that triggers the lottery. For example, if the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is changed, if the ball output information indicates the above-mentioned high success rate state, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is increased, and if the ball output information indicates the above-mentioned low If it indicates a consecutive winning state, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery may be lowered. In this case, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery may be changed using ball payout information in either of the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode. Alternatively, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery may be changed using ball payout information in one of the lottery tables (for example, CZ mode).

In addition, the lottery table for each game may be changed using the above-mentioned ball payout information. For example, if the ball payout information indicates the above-mentioned high-performance state, the push order as the main role for medal payout may be changed. The lottery process is performed using a lottery table that increases the probability of winning Bell, chance eyes A to C, Cherry A to C, and Watermelon, which are the main roles that will win the AT mode transition, and the ball output information is If it indicates the above-mentioned low winning streak state, the lottery process may be performed using a lottery table that reduces the probability of winning the main role for the above-mentioned medal payout or the main role for winning the AT mode transition. good.

Then, using the above ball output information, a counter used for the various lottery processes (AT type lottery, ceiling mode lottery, stock lottery, CZ mode transition lottery, AT mode transition lottery, lottery process for each game, etc.) It is also possible to have a configuration in which the values are different. For example, if multiple counters with different update ranges are provided and the ball output information indicates the above-mentioned high success rate state, the various lottery processes described above can be performed using counters with narrow update ranges. If the probability of winning becomes high in the processing and the ball output information indicates the above-mentioned low consecutive win state, the various lottery processes described above can be performed using a counter with a wide update range. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning is lowered.

(8) In a configuration where the ceiling counter is not initialized at the end of the advantageous section, if the ceiling counter reaches 0 in the normal section, that state will be maintained (AT mode won after moving to the advantageous section) However, when the ceiling counter is near 0 (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches 10), it may be configured to force the transition to the advantageous section, or when the ceiling counter is set in the normal section. It may be configured such that as the value becomes around 0, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section increases, or the types of game results that trigger the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone increase.

(9) The explanation was made on the assumption that the 3-bet game is played with the 2nd BB win carried over and that no bonus state occurs during the advantageous section or the normal section, but it is also possible that the bonus state occurs. good. In this case, for example, the transition to the advantageous section may occur by transitioning to the bonus state or by winning a lottery to transition to the bonus state, or by transitioning to the bonus state or by winning a lottery to transition to the bonus state. A configuration may be adopted in which winning does not cause a transition to an advantageous section, or a configuration may be adopted in which a transition to an advantageous section occurs depending on the type of bonus state, and a transition to an advantageous section does not occur in some cases.

(10) It is advantageous to calculate the net increase in the number of coins excluding games that result in replays that are displayed on the section display (calculate the net increase in coins based on the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC). Although the configuration is configured to calculate the net increase in the number of coins in the section (calculating the net increase in the number of coins based on the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increases and decreases in the advantageous section MY), the net increase in the number of coins in the section is It may also be configured to calculate the number of sheets. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the net increase in number of sheets is calculated including the normal section, or a configuration in which the net increase in number of sheets is calculated in the normal section.

In this case, it is best to use a configuration in which the calculated number of net additional coins is used to adjust the payout, and in the normal section, the winning probability of the lottery to move to the advantageous zone and the game result that triggers the lottery change depending on the net increase in the number of coins. You can also use it as

(11) The calculation of the net increase in number of coins may be performed in each game in which the ball output adjustment process is started in the second section display process, or when the process to change the ball output performance is started (AT type determination process or ceiling counter Although the configuration is such that the calculation is performed at the time of startup of the setting process, the calculation may be performed at another timing. For example, in the second section display process, the net increase in the number of coins may be calculated every time the ball output adjustment process is activated a predetermined number of times, or the process that changes the ball output performance is definitely performed. (In the AT type determination process, for example, the AT mode winning flag is stored, and in the ceiling counter setting process, for example, the AT mode transition has occurred). It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done.

(12) The consecutive game counter GC and consecutive out counter OC are configured to start updating when the interval indicator is displayed (the AT mode flag is set), assuming that an increase in medals will occur. However, the updating may be configured to start after an increase in medals actually occurs.

The consecutive game counter GC and consecutive out counter OC may be configured to start updating when small win 1 to small win 6 are achieved when the push order bell is won. When small win 1 to small win 6 are achieved, there is a high possibility that a push order notification has occurred, and by doing so, it is possible to achieve the same effect as when the interval display is displayed (in AT mode) as described above, with a simpler configuration. In addition, taking into account the fact that the push order happens to match, the update may be started when small win 1 to small win 6 are achieved a predetermined number of times in succession when the push order bell is won. In this case, the update of each of the above counters may be stopped or terminated when small win 9 to small win 32 are achieved when the push order bell is won, or when a miss occurs.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, there is an AT mode in which press order notification is possible, and there is an advantageous section in which a transition to the AT mode can occur, and a normal zone in which a transition to the AT mode does not occur. Although the explanation has been made assuming a gaming machine in which advantageous sections and normal sections are not distinguished, each of the above inventions can be applied to gaming machines in which advantageous sections and normal sections are not distinguished.

(14) The values (thresholds) of consecutive game number counter GC, advantageous section game number AG, and advantageous section increase/decrease number MY for setting the value of the first offset counter are not limited to the above ones, but may be other The value of the first offset counter may be set using the value as a threshold. For example, if the value of the consecutive game number counter GC is more than 500, 3 is input to the first offset counter, and if the value is 500 or less (first offset counter ≦2), a low consecutive game state is set. However, the threshold value for setting the first offset counter to 3 may be larger or smaller than 500, and the same applies to the threshold values for other first offset counter values.

In addition, the threshold values for determining that the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section will soon be met (number of games in the advantageous section AG≧1300, number of increase/decrease tickets in the advantageous section MY≧2000) are not limited to the above, and may be larger or smaller. It's okay. However, in order to set the threshold value at which the forced termination condition will soon be satisfied, it is preferable that the value is 70% or more of the forced termination condition (number of games in advantageous section AG = 1500, number of increase/decrease in advantageous section MY = 2400), and more Preferably, the value is 80% or more.

(15) Each value (threshold value) of the net increase in number of coins (ball output rate) for setting the value of the second offset counter is not limited to the above, and the value of the second offset counter is set using another value as the threshold value. may be set. For example, if the net increase in the number of coins is 3 or more and the ball output rate is 200%, input 2 into the second offset counter, and the low consecutive winning state is more likely to be set than when the number of coins is less than 3 (less than 200%). However, the net increase in number of coins and ball output rate, which are the threshold values for setting the second offset counter to 2, may be greater or less than that, and the threshold values for other second offset counter values are the same. It is.

(16) The value input to the first offset counter as ball output information based on consecutive game number counter GC, etc. is set to 0 to 4, and is calculated based on consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC. The value input to the second offset counter as ball output information of the net increase in number of balls was set as 0 to 2, and each ball output information was classified into 5 stages and 3 stages, but it may also be classified as a higher number of stages. It may be classified as a small number of stages, the number of stages of both pieces of ball output information may be the same number of stages, or the number of stages on the second offset counter side may be greater than that on the first offset counter.

(17) In the AT type determination process, the AT type is determined according to the consecutive rental status regardless of the setting value, while in the ceiling counter setting process, the ceiling counter ( Although the configuration is such that the AT type (ceiling mode) is determined, the setting value may also have an influence on the AT type, or the ceiling counter may be determined regardless of the setting value. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which neither of them is influenced by the set value, or a configuration in which all of the settings are influenced by the set value may be adopted.

(18) Ball output performance was changed using ball output information from each offset counter, etc. in the AT type determination process, ceiling counter setting process, and precursor game number lottery process, but the ball output information was centrally managed. From the viewpoint of reducing the processing load, it is sufficient to have at least two or more configurations that change the ball dispensing performance, and the combination thereof is free, and there may be three or more configurations. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which common ball information is used in a plurality of processes performed in the same game.

(19) The AT mode starting game is normal reply B in the first AT mode, and normal reply C in the second AT mode, and the winning probabilities for normal reply B and normal reply C are the same. However, each probability may be different. For example, if the configuration is such that it is harder to win in normal reply C than in normal reply B, the 2nd AT mode, which has a larger number of payouts, will require more games from the winning notification to the start, and the 2nd AT mode will require more games from the winning notification to the start. It is possible to suppress the increase in the number of medals until the end of the mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the actual difference in advantage between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, and while adjusting the ball output performance using the ball output information, it is possible to reduce the substantial advantage difference between the first AT mode and the second AT mode. It is also possible to prevent this from occurring.

(20) The AT mode starting game is a normal reply B in the first AT mode, and a normal reply C in the second AT mode, giving different game results, but they may be a common game result. In this case, for example, a result is provided in which the second replay result and the third replay result overlap, and the push order is announced so that the replay result corresponding to the AT mode to be transferred will be won in the result of the overlap win. It is preferable to start each AT mode after performing the above steps.

(21) In games where the AT mode start game is the replay result and the AT mode flag is set, the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC as ball output information are not updated. However, for the start game, the above ball payout information may be updated even if it is a replay result, or the start game may be changed to a result different from the replay result (for example, a game result in which 0 coins are paid out). (or a game result in which three coins are paid out), and the starting game may also be configured to be subject to update of the ball payout information.

(22) Even in the game after the AT mode winning announcement is made until the AT mode is started, the consecutive games number counter GC and consecutive games out counter OC may be updated as ball payout information. Also, in the game from when the AT mode transition lottery is held until the transition to AT mode, the consecutive games number counter GC and consecutive games out counter OC as ball output information may be updated. Then, in each of these games to be updated, a configuration may be adopted in which a net increase in the number of coins is calculated as ball output information.

(23) The AT type determination process may be performed when the AT mode transition lottery is won or when the ceiling counter becomes 0 (when the AT mode winning flag is set).

(24) Although the advantageous section is configured such that 100 games are maintained as the predetermined number of games after the AT mode ends (so as not to shift to the normal section), the predetermined number of games may be greater than 100 games. , may be less. In relation to the ceiling counter, the predetermined number of games may be greater or less than the maximum ceiling number of games in heaven mode (100 games), and is the maximum ceiling in normal mode among ceiling modes. The number of games may be the same as the number of games (999 games), or may be a larger number of games (for example, 1500 games).

Also, the predetermined number of games may be determined by lottery, and the probability that the number of games in the ceiling mode that is greater than the heaven mode will be the predetermined number of games in the lottery may vary depending on the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the number of coins in the advantageous zone MY. For example, when the forced termination condition of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG or the number of coins in the advantageous zone MY is approaching (e.g., more than 70% of the upper limit), the probability that the number of games in the advantageous zone that is greater than the heaven mode will be the predetermined number of games may be lower than before, making it easier for the advantageous zone to end.

(25) After transitioning to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone continues for a predetermined number of games of at least 100 games even without transitioning to AT mode; however, the predetermined number of games may be greater than 100 games. It may be less.

(26) By setting the initial value of each offset counter to 0 and resetting it to the initial value at the end of an advantageous section, etc., the initial setting is that the consecutive winnings state is more likely to be a high consecutive winnings state. However, by changing the initial value of each offset counter or changing the continuous play state table, the initial setting may be such that the continuous play state is likely to be a low consecutive play state.

(27) The smaller the value of the consecutive game number counter GC and the advantageous section game number AG, the smaller the value is input to the first offset counter and the more likely it is to be in a high consecutive game number state, but the consecutive game number counter GC It may also be configured such that the larger the value of the number of games in the advantageous section AG is, the smaller the value is input to the first offset counter, making it easier to enter a high consecutive winnings state.

(28) The smaller the net increase in the number of coins (output rate) calculated by the consecutive games number counter GC, consecutive games out counter OC, etc., the easier it is for a small value to be input to the second offset counter and a high consecutive games state. However, the smaller the calculated net increase in number of coins (ball output rate), the larger the value input to the second offset counter, and the easier it is to enter the low consecutive winnings state.

(29) If the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1300 or more, or if the number of increase/decrease tickets in the advantageous section MY is 2000 or more, input 4 to the first offset counter regardless of the value of the consecutive game number counter GC. The configuration is such that it is easy to get into a low consecutive winnings state, but even if the number of games in the advantageous section AG or the number of increase/decrease tickets in the advantageous section MY are greater than the target value, the first offset will be applied according to the value of the consecutive games counter GC. A configuration may be adopted in which a counter is set and the information of the consecutive game number counter GC is used for setting the first offset counter with priority over the information that the forced termination condition for the advantageous section is about to be satisfied.

(30) In the advantageous section transition lottery table, the advantageous section transition lottery was configured to be performed using all game results (all results excluding losers) that could be won in the 3 bet game in which the 2nd BB win was carried over. It is also possible to perform a lottery to move to an advantageous section, including losers (regardless of the lottery results). Further, when the advantageous section transition lottery is held, the probability of winning is set so that there will be no non-winning, but it may be configured such that some of the winnings are non-winning.

(31) In the ceiling counter setting process, a ceiling mode is determined by lottery according to the consecutive game status, and one of the number of games within the range of the determined ceiling mode is input into the current ceiling counter. Although the number of games was randomly determined, information on consecutive games is used to determine the number of games within the range of the ceiling mode. A configuration may also be adopted in which different numbers of games can be selected in the same ceiling mode depending on the continuous game state.

(32) In the ceiling counter setting process, the number of games to be input to the ceiling counter may be determined using not only the information on the consecutive game status but also other information. As other information, for example, the type of AT mode to be ended this time may be used, and in this case, the number of games input to the ceiling counter may be different between the first AT mode and the second AT mode. . More specifically, the first AT mode may have a shallower ceiling than the second AT mode (a smaller number of games may be input to the ceiling counter), or vice versa.

Further, as other information, information on the number of games AG in the advantageous section may be used. For example, the number of games smaller than the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games may be input to the ceiling counter.

(33) The upper limit payout number of the first AT mode and the second AT mode is not limited to the above, and may be higher or lower. In addition to the first AT mode and the second AT mode, other AT modes may be included, or a configuration may be provided that includes only either the first AT mode or the second AT mode.

By increasing the upper limit number of payouts than the above, the number of games required to complete the first AT mode and the second AT mode will be greater than the above, and the upper limit number of payouts will be smaller than the above. This reduces the number of games required to play the first AT mode and the second AT mode.

(34) The probability of winning the push order bell as the main role for increasing medals in each AT mode, and the number of medals paid out when minor prize 1 to minor prize 6 are achieved, are not limited to those described above, and they may be made easier or harder to win, and the number of medals paid out may be increased or decreased. In other words, the expected net increase in medals in the AT mode may be more or less than the approximately plus 8 medals in the above embodiment. By increasing the expected net increase in medals in the AT mode, the number of games required to play the first AT mode and the second AT mode will be reduced, and by decreasing the expected net increase in medals in the AT mode, the number of games required to play will be increased.

(35) The end condition for each AT mode is set to be the payout of the maximum payout number of medals, but the end condition may be something else. For example, the end condition may be set to be the completion of a predetermined number of games, or the predetermined end result may be a win or prize.

(36) In the ball output adjustment process, the information on the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC may be reset every predetermined number of games. For example, the information on the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC may be reset every 300 games or 400 games as the predetermined number of games. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of consecutive game number counters GC and consecutive game out counters OC are provided, and the consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC to be updated are changed every predetermined number of games. For example, if the predetermined number of games is 300 games or 400 games, and until the predetermined number of games is played, the first consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC are updated; The configuration may be such that the second consecutive game number counter GC and consecutive game out counter OC are updated.

(37) The information on the consecutive win out counter OC, the consecutive win game counter GC, the information on each offset counter, the consecutive win status, and the information on the net increase in number of coins calculated using the consecutive win out counter OC and the consecutive win game counter GC may be output from the main control device 101 to another control device (for example, the display control device 81, the hall computer of the gaming hall, the data management device, etc.), and the other control device may be configured to issue a notification corresponding to the output information. In this case, the other control device that receives the information can appropriately manage the payout information, and, for example, if the net increase in number of coins exceeds the design value, the manager of the gaming hall, etc., can check whether or not fraud has been committed. In addition, if the net increase in number of coins significantly exceeds the design value (if the net increase in number of coins is equal to or greater than a predetermined value), an error notification may be issued as an error processing, or error information may be output to the hall computer of the gaming hall, etc., or a game stop processing may be performed to stop the progress of the game as an error processing.

(38) Although an example of a lottery table in which the first BB or the second BB can be won individually has been shown, it may be configured such that the first BB or the second BB is not won individually but is won in combination with other game results. For example, by configuring the 1st BB or 2nd BB to be won in duplicate with any of the re-game results, in the winning game of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, the re-game results that have been won in duplicate are determined by the priority order in which winnings are achieved. It becomes easier for the side to win and be placed in a carryover state. In other words, by configuring multiple winnings as described above, it becomes difficult to win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB in the winning game.

(39) A configuration was shown in which the information on the consecutive game number counter GC and the consecutive game out counter OC is stored in the non-initialized area of the RAM 106, thereby making it possible to take over the information on the ball payout rate across advantageous sections. The configuration for avoiding the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a RAM capable of storing data is provided separately from the RAM 106, and the above-mentioned ball payout rate information is stored in the separately provided RAM. Further, the configuration may be such that information on the ball payout rate is stored in a storage area that stores the second BB winning flag.

(40) Information on games that resulted in replays was not included in the calculation of the net increase in coins, and the net increase in coins was not calculated for games that resulted in replays, but the net increase in coins was calculated. The configuration may be such that the net increase number is calculated based on the game that does not include game information but results in a replay, or the consecutive game number counter GC or consecutive game number counter GC may include information on games that result in a replay. Although the out-counter OC is updated, the net additional number of coins may not be calculated for the game that resulted in the replay.

(41) The ball output rate changes depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 having the highest ball output rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease in the amount changes. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball payout rates for some setting values are the same and the ball payout rates for other setting values are different, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate. Further, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out. In addition, settings 1 and 5 increase the number of balls in a short period of time and decrease the number of balls in a long period of time, while settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the number of balls than in settings 1 and 5. It takes a shorter time than settings 1 and 5 to reduce the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have a configuration in which almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls produced occurs. In these cases, the ball payout rate for each set value may be the same.

(42) Although a slot machine has been described that is equipped with three reels and stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a slot machine is equipped with five reels and stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel. It may also be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and stop switches corresponding thereto. Furthermore, although a slot machine has been described in which the active line is set to 1 line when the number of bets is 3, the present invention is not limited to this configuration; for example, the active line may be 5 lines.

(43) Although a specific example has been shown for the slot machine 10, the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, the slot machine may be a gaming machine (a so-called reel-type gaming machine using balls) that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

For example, the above-described inventions may be applied to a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls, with a configuration in which the ball output is adjusted. In this case, in a pachinko machine that has a high probability state and a low probability state where the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and the ball enters the predetermined entry section. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state where the ball rate varies, the above inventions may be applied by setting the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 to the high ball entry state.

In a pachinko machine, for example, the actual number of balls increased or decreased, which is the difference between the number of game balls fired from a firing device and the number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering a prescribed ball entry section, is calculated in a prescribed time. The divided number of game balls per unit time may be used for the above-mentioned ball output adjustment. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of predetermined times are provided, and the increase or decrease in the number of game balls per unit time is calculated for each of a long predetermined time and a shorter predetermined time, and these are used for adjusting the ball output.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The inventions shown in each feature group below are as follows: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines.In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions. There is a known configuration in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.Specifically, in the case of a slot machine, when a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, an internal lottery is carried out, and the reels start rotating.If the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reel stop result is determined by the internal lottery. If the game machine corresponds to the result of It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56, 57);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
Advantageous judgment that can be executed to determine whether or not an advantageous event advantageous to the player (for example, setting the super heaven mode as the ceiling mode or selecting the second AT mode as the AT type) occurs. means (a function for executing ceiling counter setting processing and AT type determination processing by the main controller 101);
a determining means (a function for executing a ball output adjustment process by the main controller 101) capable of determining predetermined increase/decrease information (net increase number) including the number of game media paid out by the payout means;
Specific setting means capable of setting different processing related to the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event based on the determination result by the determination means (that the net increase in number of sheets is 3 or more) (a continuous play state defined by a first offset counter and a second offset counter by the main controller 101, and a function to grasp the continuous play state);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, settings are made to vary the processing related to advantageous determination of whether or not to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player, based on predetermined increase/decrease information including the number of payouts of game media. By doing this, for example, if the number of payouts of game media is far from the design value, the number of payouts of the game media can be adjusted to the design value by adjusting the occurrence rate of advantageous events. This makes it possible to improve the health of the game.

Note that the "advantageous event that is advantageous to the player" may be expressed as "an advantageous event that makes it easier for the payout means to pay out game media or increases the number of game media that are paid out," and it may be expressed in this way. This makes it possible to further clarify the relationship between the predetermined increase/decrease information including the number of game media paid out by the payout means and advantageous events.

In addition, regarding the ``judgment means capable of determining predetermined increase/decrease information (net increase number) including the number of game media paid out by the said payout means'', ``the number of game media paid out by the said payout means'' It may also be expressed as a "payout information management means" that manages payout number information (consecutive winning state) calculated by performing predetermined calculation processing (calculation processing of ball output rate, net increase number of coins). In this case, the "predetermined increase/decrease information" in the configuration below may be read and applied as "payout number information".

Feature A2. The specific setting means determines that the determination result by the determination means is a result corresponding to the predetermined increase/decrease information that the number of payouts of a predetermined game medium (for example, the average number of payouts per game) is less than a specific number. In some cases, the advantageous determination is set so that the advantageous event is likely to occur, and the determination result by the determining means corresponds to the fact that the number of payouts of the predetermined game media is greater than a specific number. If it is a result, the gaming machine according to feature A1 can be set so that the advantageous event is unlikely to occur in the advantageous determination.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to adjust the payout rate based on the results of the determination of the specified increase/decrease information, such as increasing the payout rate by making it easier to generate advantageous events if the payout number of the specified gaming media is small, and decreasing the payout rate by making it harder to generate advantageous events if the payout number of the specified gaming media is large. In this way, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to effectively provide feedback on events in which the payout rate of the gaming media becomes extremely large or small.

Feature A3. Initialization means for executing initialization processing of information regarding the game based on the occurrence of an increase in the number of game media by a predetermined upper limit in a predetermined specific gaming state, and terminating the specific gaming state. (a function of executing initialization processing in the second section display processing by the main controller 101),
The advantageous event is an event that occurs in the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the determining means determines the predetermined increase/decrease information in the specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in a specific gaming state that is forcibly terminated when the number of game media increases by a predetermined upper limit increase, the predetermined increase/decrease information is determined, and based on the result, the specific gaming state Adjustments will be made to the occurrence rate of favorable events during the event. By doing so, it is also possible to prevent the number of payouts of game media in a specific gaming state from immediately reaching the upper limit increase number by adjusting the occurrence rate of advantageous events.

Feature A4. The initialization means is configured to execute the initialization process based on the fact that a predetermined upper limit number of games have been played in the specific gaming state, and to terminate the specific gaming state. can be,
The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the occurrence of the advantageous event in the specific gaming state makes it easier to reach the upper limit increase number before reaching the upper limit number of games.

According to the above configuration, the upper limit number of games is determined in addition to the upper limit increase number as a forced termination condition in a specific gaming state, and the occurrence of an advantageous event makes it easier to reach the upper limit increase number before reaching the upper limit number of games. . In such a configuration, by making it possible to adjust the occurrence rate of advantageous events using predetermined increase/decrease information, it is possible to enjoy a specific game state until the number of games reaches the upper limit if possible.

Feature A5. When the initialization process is performed and the specific game state is terminated by reaching the upper limit number of games, a bonus granting means (a performance setting process at the time of forced termination by the display control device 81) that grants a bonus to the player; functions),
When the initialization process is executed and the specific gaming state ends when the upper limit increase number is reached, the benefit granting means does not grant the benefit, or the benefit is set to be higher than when the upper limit number of games is reached. The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that the gaming machine has a configuration that makes it difficult to grant the privilege.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of making it easier to reach the upper limit number of games, that is, avoiding ending a specific gaming state when the upper limit number of games is increased, is that in addition to being able to enjoy the game for a long time, it is also possible to grant benefits. This will occur in terms of presence or absence. This makes it possible to further increase the significance of adjusting advantageous events using predetermined increase/decrease information.

Feature A6. Any of the features A1 to A5, characterized in that the determination means is capable of determining the predetermined increase/decrease information in each game in a predetermined specific situation (a game that is an advantageous section and is not a replay result). The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to constantly grasp predetermined increase/decrease information that can change from moment to moment. As a result, when adjusting the advantageous event, compared to a configuration in which the determination is made at the time of adjustment, it is possible to use a previously determined one, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load during the adjustment. In particular, the system uses the lottery results of the game to determine whether or not an advantageous event will occur, and the processing is intensive because it often involves flashy performances regardless of the outcome of the favorable determination. There is a high possibility that it will. Therefore, the above configuration is highly significant, and by doing so, optimization of control can be achieved through the decentralization of processing.

Feature A7. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a replay is given that allows a game with the same number of bets as the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means in the current game to be played without requiring new gaming media. Contains game results,
According to any one of features A1 to A6, the determining means calculates the predetermined increase/decrease information without including information on a game whose lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result. gaming machines.

In a game that results in a replay, the number of bets and the number of payouts are basically the same. Therefore, there is no increase or decrease in the amount of game media in that game. On the other hand, for example, in a configuration that calculates the increase or decrease in the number of game media per game, adding information about games resulting from replays only increases the number of games as the denominator. The number of increases and decreases will be smaller and diluted. In other words, the number of increases or decreases per game changes depending on the probability of the replay result, and the higher the winning probability of the replay result, the fewer the number, and the lower the winning probability of the replay result, the larger the number. In this case, for example, in a configuration having a plurality of gaming states (so-called RT states) with different probabilities of replay results, the number of increases or decreases per game will change depending on the plurality of gaming states. On that point, in the above configuration, by not including information on games that resulted in replays, the high or low winning probability of replay results will not affect the predetermined increase/decrease information, and the game status It becomes possible to adjust the increase or decrease of game media based on predetermined increase/decrease information without complicating the configuration, such as by setting standards for each game.

Feature A8. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation result (minor win 1 to minor win 6) is won, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. A specific result in which a second operation result (small win 9 to small win 32) that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in a second operation mode different from the operation mode (minor win 9 to small win 32) For example, the push order (bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, mode notification execution means (main) that can perform mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means. (a function of executing press order notification processing by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed,
The determining means is configured to determine the predetermined increase/decrease information based on a game in which the number of game media paid out by the payout means exceeds the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to provide different benefits to the player. On the premise of such gameplay, predetermined increase/decrease information is determined based on a game in which the number of payouts exceeds the number of bets in an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible. By doing this, it is possible to determine the predetermined increase/decrease information of game media in a situation where the user would have benefited from the mode notification, and the increase/decrease information in the normal state or the increase/decrease information of the game media even in an advantageous state can be determined. It is possible to determine the increase/decrease information in a situation where the amount of game media actually increases without considering the situation before the increase.

Regarding the "first operation result" and "second operation result," respectively, "the payout means will, if a winning is established as a result of the first operation, pay out the bet set by the number of bets setting means." If a winning number is established as a result of the second operation by paying out a number of gaming media that is larger than the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means. With this configuration, it becomes clearer that the number of payouts exceeds the number of bets when the first operation result winning is established in response to the mode notification.

Feature A9. The mode notification execution means enters a state in which the mode notification can be executed based on a predetermined start condition being satisfied in the advantageous state (for example, an AT mode is started and an AT mode flag is set). ,
The determining means is configured to determine, after the starting condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, the game is triggered by a situation in which the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means exceeds the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means. , the gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the predetermined increase/decrease information is determined.

According to the above configuration, after the start condition is established in an advantageous state, it becomes possible to determine the predetermined increase/decrease information in a situation where the mode notification has benefited, and even in the advantageous state, the mode notification is not performed. This makes it possible to more appropriately determine the increase/decrease information in a situation where the number of game media actually increases, without considering the increase/decrease information in a situation where the number of game media does not increase.

Feature A10. The determining means determines, as the predetermined increase/decrease information, an average value per game of the difference between the number of payouts of gaming media paid out by the payout means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means. It is used to determine a certain increase or decrease in the number of sheets.
The specific setting means is configured such that when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets determined by the determining means is less than a predetermined specific number (for example, 3 sheets), the advantageous event is likely to occur in the favorable determination. If the specific increase/decrease number of sheets determined by the determining means is equal to or greater than the specific number, it is possible to make it less likely that the advantageous event will occur in the advantageous determination than if it is less than the specific number. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9.

According to the above configuration, the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is determined as predetermined increase/decrease information, and settings such as the likelihood of an advantageous event occurring are changed based on the determination result. By doing this, it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of an excessively high ball output rate due to an increase in the number of specific increase/decrease coins by setting the specific setting means, thereby contributing to the soundness of the game.

Feature A11. As the specific number, a first specific number (2 pieces) and a second specific number (3 pieces) that is larger than the first specific number are set,
The specific setting means is
When the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is less than the first specific number, the advantageous event is likely to occur in the advantageous determination;
When the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is greater than or equal to the first specific number and less than the second specific number, the advantageous event is less likely to occur in the advantageous determination than when it is less than the first specific number. ,
When the specific increase/decrease number is equal to or greater than the second specific number, it is possible to make it less likely that the advantageous event will occur in the advantageous determination than when it is less than the second specific number. The gaming machine according to feature A10.

According to the above configuration, there are multiple levels of standards (specified numbers) for the specific net increase/decrease number that vary the likelihood of an advantageous event occurring depending on the specific setting means, so that the specific net increase/decrease number may become too large or too small. You can fine-tune what you want to do.

Feature A12. Game number grasping means (consecutive game number counter GC, With the number of advantageous zone games AG),
The specific setting means is characterized in that it is possible to use the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means to make a setting such that the contents of the advantageous judgment made by the advantageous judgment means are different. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11.

According to the above configuration, when setting the occurrence rate of an advantageous event using the predetermined increase/decrease information, the number of games used to determine the increase/decrease information and the number of games in a state to be set by the specific setting means are used. Ru. Therefore, for example, if the number of game media happens to increase or decrease due to a small number of games, this can be taken into consideration. Thereby, the effectiveness of setting the occurrence rate of advantageous events can be further increased.

Feature A13. The specific setting means is configured to determine that the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means is less than or equal to a predetermined number (GC=200) and that the determination result by the determining means is set as the predetermined increase/decrease information. If the result corresponds to the number of payouts of game media (for example, the average number of payouts per game) being equal to or greater than a specific number, the advantageous determination is made such that the result is likely to be that the advantageous event occurs; If the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means is greater than the predetermined number, and the determination result by the determining means is a result corresponding to the number of payouts of the predetermined game media being equal to or greater than the specific number; The number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means is equal to or less than the predetermined number, and the determination result by the determining means corresponds to the fact that the number of payouts of the predetermined game media is equal to or greater than the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized in that it is possible to make it less likely that the advantageous event will occur in the advantageous determination than in the case where the advantageous event occurs.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of payouts of the predetermined game media is the same, the number of games is less than or equal to the predetermined number, and when the number of payouts of the predetermined game media is equal to or greater than the specific number with a relatively small number of games. While it is allowed that advantageous events are more likely to occur, if the number of games exceeds a predetermined number, and the number of games is relatively large and exceeds a certain number, advantageous events are less likely to occur than when the number of games is less than a predetermined number. be made to be. In this way, even if the number of game media paid out happens to be large in a small number of games, the likelihood of an advantageous event occurring is suppressed from being adjusted. This makes it possible to more appropriately adjust the ball output through adjustment of advantageous events.

Feature A14. The specific setting means is
The number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is less than or equal to a predetermined first predetermined number (GC=200), and the predetermined increase/decrease information is a predetermined number of payouts of game media (for example, per game). If the average number of payouts (average number of payouts) is a specific number (for example, 3 pieces) or more, the advantageous event is likely to occur in the advantageous determination,
The number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means is greater than the first predetermined number and is equal to or less than a second predetermined number (500) that is greater than the first predetermined number, and further, the predetermined game medium is paid out. If the number is greater than or equal to the specific number, the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is less than or equal to the first predetermined number, and the number of payouts of the predetermined game media is greater than or equal to the specific number. , making it difficult for the advantageous event to occur in the advantageous determination;
When the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is greater than the second predetermined number and the number of payouts of the predetermined game media is equal to or greater than the specific number, the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is The advantageous event is less likely to occur in the advantageous determination than when the number is greater than the first predetermined number and less than or equal to the second predetermined number, and the number of payouts of the predetermined game media is equal to or greater than the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature A13, characterized in that it is possible to make the following.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of payouts of the predetermined game media is the same, the advantageous event is most likely to occur when the number of games is less than or equal to the first predetermined number, and the advantageous event is most likely to occur when the number of games is less than or equal to the first predetermined number. A case where the number is less than or equal to the second predetermined number is the next most likely to occur, and a case where the number is greater than the second predetermined number is the least likely to occur. By doing this, even if the number of payouts of a predetermined game medium happens to be large in a small number of games, the likelihood of occurrence of an advantageous event is suppressed from being adjusted, and the payout through adjustment of advantageous events is suppressed. Ball adjustments can be made more in line with the progress of the game.

Feature A15. A setting means (a function for executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101) for setting setting values in multiple stages that can cause changes in the increase/decrease rate or the increase/decrease manner of the game media,
The determination means determines whether a first set value (setting 1) is set by the setting means or a second set value (setting 6) different from the first set value. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein even if the determination results of the predetermined increase/decrease information are the same, the likelihood of the advantageous event occurring differs.

According to the above configuration, even if the predetermined increase/decrease information is the same, if the setting values are different, the likelihood of an advantageous event occurring will be different. In other words, even if a common determination process is performed to determine the predetermined increase/decrease information regardless of the set value, the likelihood of an advantageous event occurring will differ depending on subsequent parameters, etc. This makes it possible to diversify the payout rate (rate of increase/decrease in game media and mode of increase/decrease) based on the set value while simplifying the configuration for determining the predetermined increase/decrease information.

Feature A16. When the first setting value is set by the setting means, the probability that the advantageous event will occur in the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is the first probability, and the setting means sets the first setting value. In the case where two set values are set, the advantageous judgment is made such that the probability that the advantageous event occurs in the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is a second probability different from the first probability. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein: is set.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature A15, and especially in a configuration in which an advantageous event is caused by a configuration such as determination means → specific setting means → advantageous determination means as in the above configuration, the downstream advantageous determination means generates an advantageous event. By making the occurrence probabilities different, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature A15 with a relatively simple design change.

Feature A17. The specific setting means sets, as the predetermined increase/decrease information, the advantageous events when the number of payouts of a predetermined game medium (for example, the average number of payouts per game) is less than a specific number and when it is greater than or equal to the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature A15 or feature A16, wherein the difference in likelihood of occurrence can be made different between the first set value and the second set value.

The above configuration is also a specific configuration of feature A15 and feature A16, and especially in a configuration in which an advantageous event is caused by a configuration such as the determination means → specific setting means → advantageous determination means as in the above configuration, the upstream determination means is advantageous. By making the probability of occurrence of an event different, for example, in a configuration having multiple advantage determination means, it is possible to have the influence of the set value on the multiple advantage determination means, which requires many parameter changes. It becomes possible to achieve the effects of feature A15 and feature A16 without any trouble.

Feature A18. As a specific state (AT mode) in which the payout means is likely to pay out game media, a first specific state in which a first payout number of game media is likely to be paid out and a second specific state in which a second payout number of game media that is greater than the first payout number is likely to be paid out are set;
a selection means (a function of executing an AT type determination process by a main control device 101) for selecting whether to cause a transition to the specific state, the first specific state or the second specific state, when causing a transition to the specific state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that the advantage determination means makes the advantage determination that the selection of the second specific state by the selection means is the advantageous event.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature A1, and in a configuration in which a first specific state and a second specific state are set as specific states in which the payout of game media is more likely to occur, the advantage determining means is the side with the largest number of payouts. It is determined whether or not the second specific state is selected, and the selection rate of the second specific state differs depending on predetermined increase/decrease information. In particular, with such a configuration, there is no need to change the transition rate to a specific state itself, so it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice that the ball output has been adjusted due to the change. Become.

Feature A19. As the gaming state, a specific state (AT mode) is set in which it is easy for the payout means to pay out game media,
A transition lottery (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state using the lottery result by the lottery means;
A specific transition means (a step by the main controller 101) that causes a transition to the specific state based on the number of games from a predetermined setting opportunity reaching a specific number of games, regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means. (a function that executes the process of making an affirmative determination in S815);
Based on the setting trigger, the specific number of games is selected from a plurality of types of number of games, including a first specific number of games (for example, 30 games) and a second specific number of games that is larger than the first specific number of games (for example, 100 games). a specific number of games setting means (a function for executing ceiling counter setting processing by the main controller 101);
Any one of features A1 to A18, characterized in that the advantageous determination means performs the advantageous determination in which the first specific number of games is set by the specific number of games setting means as the advantageous event. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

The above configuration is also a specific configuration of feature A1, and has a specific state in which the payout of game media is likely to occur, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a transition to the specific state based on the lottery result of the game. On this premise, the specific number of games as a so-called ceiling that causes a transition to a specific state when the specific number of games is played varies depending on predetermined increase/decrease information. In particular, with this configuration, it is possible to adjust the appearance rate while not changing the transition lottery itself for transitioning to a specific state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a phenomenon in which a shift to a specific state does not occur when a low so-called rare combination is won, and to adjust the ball output without giving a player a sense of discomfort.

Feature A20: The determination means determines, as the predetermined increase/decrease information, a specific increase/decrease number that is an average value per game of the difference between the number of game media paid out by the payout means and the number of bets set by the bet number setting means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A19, characterized in that it is equipped with a special notification execution means (a function of executing a process for notifying a state transition by a display control device 81) that can execute a special notification regarding the specific increase or decrease in the number of coins determined by the determination means by a specified notification means.

According to the above configuration, since the net increase in number of coins as a specific increase/decrease number can be grasped by special notification, the player can play the game while knowing how quickly the number of game media is increasing (decreasing). It becomes possible to do so. In particular, unlike configurations in which the number of game media acquired is notified or the total number of games in an advantageous state is reported, specific increases and decreases as a result of calculations based on the number of game media acquired and the total number of games. Since the information is about the number of coins, it is possible to avoid reporting information that is undesirable to the player, such as, for example, that the player has not actually acquired many game media or that the total number of games is short. More specifically, even if the total number of game media acquired is small, the specific increase/decrease number can be large if the total number of games is small. This makes it possible to avoid a decline in interest.

Feature A21. comprising a first prediction means (a function for executing state transition notification processing by the main controller 101) for predicting the specific increase/decrease number of coins after a predetermined number of games;
The gaming machine according to feature A20, wherein the special notification executing means is capable of executing, as the special notification, a notification regarding the specific increase/decrease number of coins predicted by the first prediction means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the occurrence rate of advantageous events changes depending on the specific number of coins, the player can play the game knowing in advance that the occurrence rate will change. In particular, since the specific number of coins is the average value of the difference between the number of coins paid out and the amount of money bet, if it is predicted that the specific number of coins paid out after a predetermined number of games will be greater than the specific number, making it difficult for advantageous events to occur, the player can play the game hoping for a game result in which the number of coins paid out is reduced. In this way, it is possible to realize gameplay that is the exact opposite of normal games, and it is possible to increase interest through diversification of gameplay.

Feature A22. a second prediction means (a function for executing state transition notification processing by the main controller 101) for predicting the specific increase/decrease number when a predetermined number of game media is paid out by the payout means;
The gaming machine according to feature A20 or feature A21, wherein the special notification execution means is capable of executing a notification regarding the specific increase/decrease number of coins predicted by the second prediction means as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the occurrence rate of an advantageous event changes depending on a specific increase or decrease in the number of coins, it is possible to allow the player to play a game while knowing in advance that the occurrence rate will change. In particular, the specific increase/decrease number is the average value of the difference between the number of coins paid out and the number of bets, so after a predetermined number of coins are paid out, the specific increase/decrease number will be greater than the specific number, making it difficult for advantageous events to occur. In the case of prediction, the player plays the game while hoping for a game result that will reduce the number of coins paid out so that the number of coins paid out does not reach that number. This makes it possible to increase interest through diversification of gameplay.

Note that the "predetermined number of coins" may be expressed as "the number of coins required to be paid out until the specific increase/decrease number reaches the specific number".

Feature A23. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56, 57);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
Advantageous events that make it easier for the payout means to pay out game media or increase the number of game media that are paid out (for example, setting the super heaven mode as the ceiling mode, or selecting the second AT mode as the AT type) ) (a function for executing ceiling counter setting processing and AT type determination processing by the main controller 101);
Calculation means (main controller) that calculates a specific increase/decrease number that is the average value per game of the difference between the number of game media paid out by the payout means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means. In the ball output adjustment process performed by the device 101, a function of calculating the net increase in the number of coins);
If the specific increase/decrease number of sheets calculated by the calculation means is less than a predetermined specific number (for example, 3 sheets), the calculation is performed by the calculation means such that the advantageous event is likely to occur in the advantageous determination. Changing means for making it less likely that the advantageous event will occur in the advantageous determination when the specified increase/decrease number is greater than or equal to the specified number than when it is less than the specified number. a continuous play state defined by the first offset counter and the second offset counter, and a function to grasp the continuous play state);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific increase/decrease number, which is the average value per game of the difference between the number of game media used in each game and the number of game media paid out in each game, is calculated, and the specific increase/decrease number is calculated. If the number is less than a specific number, an advantageous event that makes it easier for game media to be paid out will likely occur, and if it is greater than the specific number, an advantageous event will be less likely to occur. Therefore, as advantageous events become more likely to occur, the subsequent specified increase/decrease number of coins tends to increase, and as advantageous events become less likely to occur, the subsequent specific increase/decrease number tends to decrease. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific increase/decrease number from becoming too large or too small, and to improve the health of the game.

Note that the "changing means" may be expressed, for example, as "changing means that makes it possible to change the content of the advantageous determination by using the specific increase/decrease number of sheets calculated by the calculating means."

Moreover, each of the configurations limited to the features A1 to A22 described above may be applied individually to the feature A23, or may be applied in combination.

Feature A24. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56, 57);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
Advantageous events that make it easier for the payout means to pay out game media or increase the number of game media that are paid out (for example, setting the super heaven mode as the ceiling mode, or selecting the second AT mode as the AT type) ) (a function for executing ceiling counter setting processing and AT type determination processing by the main controller 101);
Calculation means for calculating a specific increase/decrease number of coins that is the difference between the number of game media paid out by the payout means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means (for adjusting the payout by the main controller 101) In the process, a function that executes the process of calculating the net increase in the number of sheets),
If the specific increase/decrease number of sheets calculated by the calculation means is less than a predetermined specific number (for example, 3 sheets), the calculation is performed by the calculation means such that the advantageous event is likely to occur in the advantageous determination. Changing means for making it less likely that the advantageous event will occur in the advantageous determination when the specified increase/decrease number is greater than or equal to the specified number than when it is less than the specified number. a continuous play state defined by the first offset counter and the second offset counter, and a function to grasp the continuous play state);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of game media used in each game and the number of game media paid out in each game, is calculated, and if the specific increase/decrease number is less than or equal to the specific number, An advantageous event that makes it easier for game media to be paid out becomes more likely to occur, and if the number exceeds a specific number, an advantageous event becomes less likely to occur. Therefore, as advantageous events become more likely to occur, the subsequent specified increase/decrease number of coins tends to increase, and as advantageous events become less likely to occur, the subsequent specific increase/decrease number tends to decrease. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific increase/decrease number from becoming too large or too small, and to improve the health of the game.

Note that the "changing means" may be expressed, for example, as "changing means that makes it possible to change the content of the advantageous determination by using the specific increase/decrease number of sheets calculated by the calculating means."

Moreover, each of the configurations limited to the features A1 to A22 described above may be applied individually to the feature A23, or may be applied in combination.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56, 57);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
A first advantageous determination means (a first advantageous determination means for executing a first advantageous determination as to whether or not a first advantageous event advantageous to the player (selecting the super heaven mode as the ceiling mode) occurs function to perform configuration processing), and
a second advantageous determination for determining whether a second advantageous event (selecting a second AT mode as the type of AT mode) that is advantageous to the player and different from the first advantageous event occurs; means (a function for executing AT type determination processing by the main controller 101);
A payout that manages payout number information (consecutive game status) calculated by performing predetermined arithmetic processing (processing for calculating the payout rate and net increase number of coins) on the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information management means (a function for executing processing for adjusting ball output by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
The first advantage determination means is configured to be able to execute the first advantage determination using the payout number information,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second advantageous determination means is configured to be able to execute the second advantageous determination using the payout number information.

According to the above configuration, the payout number information calculated by performing predetermined arithmetic processing on the payout number of game media is managed by the payout information management means, and the payout number information is used to determine the first advantageous event. A first advantageous determination is made as to whether or not to cause a second advantageous event to occur, and a second advantageous determination is made as to whether or not a second advantageous event is caused. In other words, the configuration is such that the centrally managed common payout number information is used for each advantageous determination of whether or not to cause different events such as the first advantageous event and the second advantageous event, and by doing so, There is no need to perform arithmetic processing to calculate payout number information when executing each advantageous determination, and it is possible to reduce the processing load by distributing the processing.

The first and second specific events that are "advantageous to the player" may be expressed as first and second specific events that "make it easier for gaming media to be paid out by the payout means or increase the number of gaming media paid out," and in this way, it is possible to more clearly define the relationship between the payout number information managed by the payout information management means and each advantageous event.

The "payout information management means for managing payout number information (winning streak status) calculated by performing a predetermined calculation process (calculation process of ball payout rate and net increase in number) on the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means" may also be expressed as "a determination means capable of determining predetermined increase/decrease information (net increase in number) including the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means." In this case, the "payout number information" in the following configuration may be read as "predetermined increase/decrease information" and applied.

Feature B2. According to feature B1, the game in which the first advantageous determination is made by the first advantageous determination means and the game in which the second advantageous determination is made by the second advantageous determination means are different games. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, since each advantageous judgment is a different game, the payout information is shared between the different games. In this way, it is possible to more effectively utilize the effect of centrally managing the payout information used for each advantageous judgment.

Feature B3. According to feature B1 or feature B2, the payout information management means manages the payout number information by performing the predetermined arithmetic processing in each game in a predetermined specific situation. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the payout number information is updated every game, each advantageous determination can always be made using the latest information. In addition, by performing calculation processing on the payout number information for each game, the processing load for each game becomes more uniform, and the processing load increases only for each advantageous judgment that may be made in irregular games. can be avoided.

Feature B4. A setting means (a function for executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101) for setting setting values in multiple stages that can cause changes in the increase/decrease rate or the increase/decrease manner of the game media,
The payout number information is common in the case where the first setting value (setting 1) is set by the setting means and the case where the second setting value (setting 6) different from the first setting value is set. When used, the first advantageous judgment by the first advantageous judgment means has a common probability that the first advantageous event will occur, whereas the second advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means has a common probability that the first advantageous event occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein in the determination, the probability of the second advantageous event occurring is different.

In the above configuration, while using the common payout number information, there is no setting difference in the first advantageous determination, and there is a setting difference in the second advantageous determination. Even if there is a setting difference in the occurrence rate and an event that is not, it is only necessary to adjust the lottery probability etc. at the time of favorable judgment for each, further increasing the merit of using common payout number information becomes possible.

Feature B5. A setting means (a function for executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101) for setting setting values in multiple stages that can cause changes in the increase/decrease rate or the increase/decrease manner of the game media,
Even if the number of payouts is the same in the case where the first setting value (setting 1) is set by the setting means and the case where the second setting value (setting 6) different from the first setting value is set, , the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the payout number information managed by the payout information management means is different.

As in the above configuration, by providing a setting difference in the payout number information itself as common data used for each advantage determination, it is possible to provide a setting difference in each advantage determination with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature B6. A specific state (AT mode) in which the payout means is likely to pay out gaming media is set as the gaming state;
The first advantage determination means executes the first advantage determination before the transition to the specific state,
The second advantage determination means executes the second advantage determination after the transition to the specific state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the payout information management means is capable of executing the specified calculation processing before transition to the specific state, and is capable of executing the specified calculation processing after transition to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, the first advantageous determination and the second advantageous determination are performed before and after the increase in the amount of game media. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the information on the number of balls to be put out will be different depending on the situation where the first advantageous determination is made and the situation where the second advantageous determination is made. Therefore, by configuring the payout information management means to perform predetermined arithmetic processing before and after transition to a specific state, it becomes possible to make an advantageous determination using appropriate payout number information in each situation.

Feature B7. The payout information management means includes first specific information (consecutive game out counter OC) regarding the number of game media paid out by the payout means, and information on the number of games to be managed based on the number of payout information. Any of the features B1 to B6, characterized in that the payout number information can be managed by executing the predetermined arithmetic processing using the second specific information (consecutive game number counter GC). The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, the payout number information is managed using a plurality of pieces of specific information, so that it is different from the mere number of payouts and is more meaningful to be managed separately from the advantageous determination. In particular, the first specific information corresponding to the number of payouts of game media and the second specific information corresponding to the number of games played are not very meaningful for each game (because the information covers multiple games). By managing the information on the number of payouts based on a combination of information that makes sense, it is possible to reduce the impact of cases where a large number of payouts happen to occur, and to make more favorable judgments regarding the player's profits. becomes possible.

Feature B8. The payout information management means includes first ball payout information (using a net increase in the number of coins) using information calculated by executing the predetermined calculation process using the first specific information and the second specific information. managing the payout number information using a second offset counter) and a second ball information using the second specific information (a first offset counter using a consecutive game number counter GC); The gaming machine described in feature B7.

According to the above configuration, the payout number information is not managed by using the first specific information and the second specific information as they are, but by performing predetermined calculation processing using the first specific information and the second specific information. It is managed by the first ball information calculated by performing this and the second ball information using the second specific information. In this way, by making the management of the payout number information more complicated, the merits of centrally managing the payout information management means instead of calculating the payout number information at each advantageous judgment can be further enhanced.

Feature B9. The specific state (AT mode) in which the payout of game media is likely to occur by the payout means is a first specific state in which the payout of a first number of game media is likely to occur, and a second payout that is greater than the first number of payouts. a second specific state in which the payout of a number of game media is likely to occur;
When the transition to the specific state is caused, selection means for selecting which specific state to cause the transition to, the first specific state or the second specific state (AT type determination processing by the main controller 101) ),
Features B1 to B8, characterized in that the first advantageous determination means performs the first advantageous determination in which the selection of the second specific state by the selection means is the first advantageous event. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the above configuration, in the configuration where the first specific state and the second specific state are set as specific states in which the payout of game media is likely to occur, the first advantage determining means determines that the second specific state on the side where the number of payouts is large is This is to determine whether or not it is selected, and the selection rate of the second specific state differs depending on the payout number information. In particular, with this configuration, the rate of transition to the specific state itself can be the same, making it difficult for players to notice that adjustments have been made based on payout number information. .

Feature B10. comprising a transition lottery means (a function for executing an AT mode transition lottery process by the main controller 101) that performs a transition lottery to determine whether to transition to the specific state;
The first advantage determination means is characterized in that the first advantage determination means performs the first advantage determination in a game subsequent to the game in which the transition lottery is performed in which the transition lottery means causes a transition to the specific state. The gaming machine described in feature B9.

According to the above configuration, even if there is a gap between the transition lottery being performed by the transition lottery means and the transition to the specific state, the first advantageous judgment, such as the selection of the second specific state, is performed using the payout amount information corresponding to the time of the transition. In this way, if the number of gaming media decreases between the time the transition occurs and the time the transition occurs after the transition lottery is won, it is possible to make a selection that takes this into consideration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56, 57);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a replay is given that allows a game with the same number of bets as the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means in the current game to be played without requiring new gaming media. Contains game results,
In a predetermined specific situation (advantageous section), the number of payouts of gaming media paid out by the payout means and the bet A calculating means (a function for executing a process for adjusting the ball output by the main controller 101) for calculating a specific increase/decrease number of coins, which is the average value per game of the difference between the number of bets on the gaming media set by the number setting means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the specific increase/decrease number is calculated as the so-called net increase number, which is the average value of the difference between the number of game media paid out and the number of bets. By doing this, it becomes possible to monitor the specific increase/decrease number of coins in real time, and if the specific increase/decrease number becomes too large or too small than the design value, the number of payouts can be changed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the gaming machine itself performs feedback control of ball output management, such as making adjustments.

In particular, in the above configuration, since the specific increase/decrease number is calculated except for games that result in replays, it is possible to move to a special state such as so-called replay time where the probability of replay results is different. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to manage the ball output based on a specific increase/decrease number of coins without being affected by changes in the probability of replay results. It is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the specific increase/decrease number of coins is diluted due to many winnings in the game results. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the above-mentioned merits of calculating the specific increase/decrease number with a simpler configuration without being affected by the winning probability or bias of success or failure of the re-gaming results.

Feature C2. According to feature C1, the calculation means is capable of calculating the specific increase/decrease number without including a trigger game that triggers the calculation of the specific increase/decrease number by the calculation means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when calculating the specific increase or decrease, it is possible to perform the calculation without including information about the game that triggers the calculation. In this way, the process of deciding to start the calculation and the calculation process are performed in different games, which allows for decentralization of the processing. Also, for example, in a configuration in which information that the calculation of the specific increase or decrease is about to start is output to the hall computer of the gaming hall, or a notification is made that the calculation is about to start, and further information about the calculated specific increase or decrease is output or notified to the same hall computer, in the game that triggers the start, only one piece of information (information about the start) is output or notified, which makes it possible to preferably avoid errors and the like due to confusion of information.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the trigger game that is the trigger for starting the game is a lottery result by the lottery means that is the predetermined replay result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific increase/decrease number of coins is calculated without including information on the game that is the replay result, the trigger game that is the trigger for starting also becomes the replay result, so it is difficult to determine whether it is the trigger game or not. There is no need to make a deliberate decision, and processing can be simplified.

Feature C4. In the specific situation, a transition lottery means (which executes an AT lottery process by the main control device 101 function),
The transition lottery means is capable of executing the transition lottery such that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined re-gaming result, the transition lottery results in a transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C3.

According to the above configuration, when calculating the specific increase/decrease number of coins in a specific situation, a specific state is set in which the payout of game media is likely to occur during the specific situation, and in a game that results in a predetermined replay result, It becomes possible to win a lottery to enter a specific state. By doing this, the information of the game in which a lottery to move to a specific state that can have a large influence on the calculated specific increase/decrease number of coins will not be used for calculating the specific increase/decrease number. In a configuration where the playability and game content change depending on the number of coins increased or decreased, it is possible to disperse the points of interest (games of interest) and suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C5. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result (for example, a watermelon with a small winning combination of 7) is set that allows a predetermined number of game media to be paid out,
The transition lottery means is capable of executing the transition lottery such that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result, the transition lottery results in a transition to the specific state,
The setting is such that the probability of the result of shifting to the specific state is higher when the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined re-gaming result than when the lottery result is the payout result. The gaming machine according to feature C4.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a transition to a specific state may occur even with a payout result rather than a predetermined replay result, the probability that a transition to a specific state will occur with a predetermined replay result is higher As a result, the probability that a transition to a specific state will occur is higher than the probability that a transition to a specific state will occur. Thereby, the effect of feature C4 can be suitably achieved while diversifying the paths through which the transition to the specific state occurs.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C5, characterized in that it is provided with a game number grasping means (advantageous zone game number AG) for grasping the number of games including the game for which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the replay result in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, the number of games including replay results in a specific situation is grasped separately from the number of games excluding replay results used by the calculation means to calculate the specific increase/decrease number of coins. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably monitor the ball output status using the number of games actually played in a specific situation and the specific increase/decrease number of coins.

Feature C7. Storage means (various counter areas 106e in RAM 106 of main controller 101) for storing specific information (first offset counter, second offset counter) regarding the specific increase/decrease number of sheets calculated by the calculation means;
Initialization means for initializing the specific information stored in the storage means based on the completion of the specific situation (a function for executing initialization processing in the second section display processing by the main controller 101); ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, during a specific situation, the specific information regarding the specific increase/decrease number of sheets calculated by the calculation means is stored in the storage means, so that when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is desired to be used for some processing, the specific information This makes it possible to understand the information from the beginning, making it more convenient than a configuration where it is calculated each time it is used. Moreover, since the specific information is initialized when the specific situation ends, the specific increase/decrease number of sheets will be newly calculated in the next specific situation, regardless of the previous specific situation. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably monitor the specific increase/decrease in the number of sheets for each specific situation.

Feature C8. When the storage means is initialized by the initialization means, a separate storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the specific information before the initialization so as not to be initialized by the initialization means. (non-initialized area in RAM 106 of main controller 101),
The calculation means is capable of calculating the specific increase/decrease number of sheets in the specific situation that occurs after the initialization by using information corresponding to the specific information stored in the separate storage device. The gaming machine according to feature C7.

According to the above configuration, although it is assumed that the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is initialized when the specific situation ends, the specific information corresponding to the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is stored in a separate storage means at the time of initialization. may be carried over even after initialization. Then, in a specific situation that occurs after the initialization, a specific increase/decrease number of sheets can be calculated using the specific information before the initialization. By doing this, it is possible to monitor the specific increase/decrease in the number of sheets across specific situations, while monitoring the specific increase/decrease in the number of sheets in each specific situation.

Feature C9. The calculation means uses the specific information stored in the separate storage means when the specific situation occurs after a predetermined number of specific games after the initialization by the initialization device. The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized in that it is possible to calculate the specific increase/decrease number of coins without changing the number of coins.

According to the above configuration, by setting an upper limit on the number of games in which the specific information stored in the separate storage means can be used, even if the period between the end of specific information and the next specific information is too long, Regardless, the use of specific information is restricted. In other words, if the number of games between two specific situations is within the specific number of games, the specific increase/decrease number in the previous specific situation is carried over and the specific increase/decrease number in the next specific situation is calculated. It becomes like this. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably perform monitoring across specific situations.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The separate storage means initializes the stored specific information if the specific situation does not occur for a predetermined number of specific games after the initialization by the initialization device. is possible.”

Feature C10. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result different from the first operation result is won by operating in the operation mode,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, mode notification execution means (main) that can perform mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means. (a function of executing press order notification processing by the control device 101),
An advantageous section in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means can be executed and a normal section in which the mode notification cannot be executed by the mode notification execution means are set,
The specific situation is included in the advantageous section,
The calculation means calculates the specific increase/decrease number in response to a game in which the number of game media paid out by the payout means exceeds the number of bets set by the bet number setting means in the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to provide different benefits to the player. Based on this kind of gameplay, a specific increase or decrease is triggered by a game in which the number of payouts exceeds the number of bets in an advantageous section where mode notification is possible, that is, a game in which the specific increase or decrease number of coins is positive. The number of sheets is calculated. By doing this, it becomes possible to calculate the specific increase/decrease number of coins in a situation where the user would have benefited from the mode notification, and it is possible to calculate the specific increase/decrease number of coins in a situation where the user would have benefited from the mode notification. It is possible to calculate a specific increase/decrease in the number of game media in a situation where the number of game media is substantially increased without considering the increase/decrease in the number of media before the increase/decrease in the number of media.

Feature C11. The mode notification execution means is in a state where it can execute the mode notification based on a predetermined start condition being satisfied in the advantageous section (for example, an AT mode winning notification effect is performed);
The calculation means is configured to take as a trigger a game in which the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means exceeds the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means after the start condition is satisfied in the advantageous section. , the gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the specific increase/decrease number of coins is calculated.

According to the above configuration, after the start condition is established in an advantageous section, it is possible to calculate a specific increase or decrease in the number of sheets in a situation where the condition notification has been benefited, and even in an advantageous section, the condition notification is not performed. It is possible to more appropriately calculate the specific increase/decrease number in a situation where the number of game media actually increases without considering the increase/decrease number in a situation where the number of game media does not increase.

Feature C12. Multiple levels of setting information (consecutive game status) that can cause changes in the increase and decrease mode of gaming media are defined,
The game machine is equipped with a changing means (a function for executing ball output adjustment processing by the main control device 101) capable of changing the setting information using the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the calculating means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11.

According to the above configuration, the setting information is changed using the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the calculation means, and a change occurs in the increase/decrease mode of game media. In other words, it is possible to perform feedback control of the increase/decrease mode of game media using the specific increase/decrease number, and it is possible to suppress increase/decrease in game media that differs greatly from the design value.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56, 57);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by operating in an operation mode is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, mode notification execution means (main) that can perform mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means. (a function of executing press order notification processing by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which it is possible to transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is executable, and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution unit is not executable. (normal section) and are set,
a game number grasping means (advantageous interval game number AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
In the advantageous state, an advantageous judgment is made as to whether or not an advantageous event advantageous to the player (for example, the ceiling mode is set to super heaven mode, or the AT type is selected as the second AT mode) is caused. executable advantage determination means (a function for executing ceiling counter setting processing and AT type determination processing by the main controller 101);
When the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means is the first number, the processing related to the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event is made advantageous to the player, and the number of games grasping means If the number of games to be grasped is a second number that is greater than the first number, the process regarding the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event is more disadvantageous to the player than in the case of the first number. A specific setting means that can be set as follows (the continuous play state defined by the first offset counter and the second offset counter by the main controller 101, and the function to grasp the continuous play state),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to provide different benefits to the player. In this case, the specific state where mode notification is possible is set so that it can be transferred to an advantageous state, and the mode notification itself is not performed in the normal state, so the advantage of the advantageous state over the normal state is guaranteed. As a result, the player can clearly understand that the game is designed to aim for an advantageous state.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the number of executed games in an advantageous state is grasped by the number of games grasping means, and in a situation where the number of executed games is the first number, which is the beginning of an advantageous condition, it is difficult to determine whether or not an advantageous event will occur. In a situation where the processing related to the advantageous judgment becomes advantageous to the player and the number of games executed is near the end of the advantageous state such as the second number is larger than the first number, the processing related to the advantageous judgment becomes more disadvantageous than the beginning. becomes. By doing this, it is possible to increase the gameplay by setting the height of the wave of advantage in an advantageous state, while also preventing the overall advantage from becoming too high in one advantageous state. .

Not only that, but by setting the fluctuations in the degree of advantage during advantageous states as described above, for example, even if advantageous states are consecutive, there will be successive high and low advantageous states. In other words, the degree of advantage will be low at the end of the advantageous state of the first player, and high at the beginning of the advantageous state of the second player, so that even if advantageous states are consecutive, consecutive high advantageous states are avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the degree of advantage from becoming too high across advantageous states.

Feature D2. A termination means (a function of performing a forced termination process in the section display second process by the main control device 101) is provided to terminate the advantageous state based on the fact that the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games, regardless of whether the specific state is in place or not;
The gaming machine described in feature D1 is characterized in that the specific setting means is capable of setting the processing related to the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event to be advantageous to the player when the number of games up to the maximum number of games is a third number, and when the number of games up to the maximum number of games is a fourth number greater than the third number, the processing related to the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event to be disadvantageous to the player compared to when the number is the third number.

According to the above configuration, it becomes clearer that the advantage level decreases in the final stage of the advantageous state in the feature D1. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a wave of advantageous degrees during an advantageous state, such as a high advantageous degree at the beginning of the advantageous state and a low advantageous degree at the end of the advantageous state.

Feature D3. After the specific state ends, a post-end holding means capable of restricting the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined number of games (a function that executes a process of inputting 100 into an advantageous period continuation counter by the main controller 101) and,
a number of games setting means (a function for executing a ceiling game number setting process by the main controller 101) for setting the number of games to be played until the next transition to the specific state after the end of the predetermined specific state;
Equipped with
The specific setting means performs processing related to the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event by making the number of games set by the number of games setting means likely to be less than the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that it is possible to make it advantageous for players.

According to the above configuration, since the advantageous state continues for a predetermined number of games after a specific state during an advantageous state, the advantageous state can be subject to forced termination due to the upper limit of the number of games, including cases where the specific state continues within the predetermined number of games, and the effectiveness of the upper limit of the number of games can be improved. In such a configuration, the so-called ceiling game number as the number of games until the transition to the next specific state after the end of the specific state is set to be less than the predetermined number of games so that consecutive wins are more likely to occur in the early stages of the advantageous state, and conversely, the ceiling game number is set to be greater than the predetermined number of games so that consecutive wins are less likely to occur in the late stages of the advantageous state. In this way, it is possible to realize fluctuations in the degree of advantage during an advantageous state, while using a relatively simple configuration such as changing the method of setting the ceiling game number, and to prevent the degree of advantage from becoming too high across one or multiple advantageous states.

Feature D4. When transitioning from the advantageous state to the normal state, initialization means capable of initializing the number of games set by the number of games setting means (initialization processing is performed in the second section display processing by the main controller 101) function) and
When transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state, a second number of games setting means (when the main controller 101 wins the advantageous section) sets the number of games from the transition to the advantageous state until the transition to the specific state. function to execute AT ceiling setting processing),
The gaming machine according to feature D3, comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the advantageous state ends, the ceiling number of games set by the number of games setting means is initialized, and when the advantageous state returns again after the end, the second number of games setting is performed. The ceiling number of games is set by means. In other words, if the number of games after a specific state ends is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games and the advantageous state ends, the number of ceiling games at that time will not be carried over, but the number of ceiling games will be restarted when the state shifts to an advantageous state. Set. By doing so, it is possible to end the advantageous state using the setting of the number of ceiling games, and it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the number of ceiling games is not set at the time of transition to the advantageous state.

Feature D5. As the specific state, a first specific state and a second specific state that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state are set,
When the transition to the specific state is caused, selection means for selecting which specific state to cause the transition to, the first specific state or the second specific state (AT type determination processing by the main controller 101) ),
The specific setting means makes the second specific state more likely to be selected by the selection device than the first specific state, so that the process regarding the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that it is possible to make the following.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration where the first specific state and the second specific state having different advantages are set, the advantageous second specific state is more likely to be selected in the early stages of the advantageous state, and conversely, in the final stage, the first specific state is more likely to be selected. The height of the wave of advantageousness in an advantageous state is set so that a specific state is easily selected. In this way, by using the second specified state with a high degree of advantage and the first specified state with a lower degree of advantage, it is possible to directly set the actual degree of advantage in setting the height of the wave of advantage. This makes it easier to realize the wave.

Feature D6. The specific setting means determines whether or not to cause the advantageous event, the smaller the number of games in the situation after transitioning to the specific state among the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that processing related to determination can be made advantageous for the player.

According to the above configuration, the setting is made such that the smaller the number of games that have occurred since the transition to the specific state among the advantageous states, the more likely the advantage is to become high. By doing this, the advantage becomes higher when the number of games is small, which is a situation in which an increase in the number of game media can be expected, and the advantage in the early stages when the game is more advantageous can be suitably increased, and vice versa. Even if the advantageous state continues for a long time, it is also possible to prevent the degree of advantage at the final stage of the advantageous state from being kept lower than necessary, including the situation where the state has not yet transitioned to a specific state.

Feature D7. Based on the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games, an ending means (main control (a function for performing forced termination processing in the second section display processing by the device 101);
When the number of games ascertained by the number-of-games grasping means is equal to or greater than a predetermined specific number of games, the specific setting means moves the number of games to the specific state out of the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means. Regardless of the number of games played in the situation after the game, the processing related to the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event may be set to be more disadvantageous to the player than in a situation where the number of games is less than the specific number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that it is possible.

According to the above configuration, when the number of games played during an advantageous state is equal to or greater than the specific number of games, the advantage level during the advantageous state becomes lower regardless of the number of games played in the situation after transitioning to the specific state. is set to In other words, the number of games played in an advantageous state is a better condition for setting the advantage than the number of games played in a specific state, and by doing this, it is possible to prevent the advantageous state from continuing for too long. It becomes possible to set a high or low degree of advantage while not violating the significance of setting an upper limit on the number of games executed in an advantageous state, such as preventing the game from becoming too advantageous.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the specific number of games is set as a number of games that is 70% or more of the upper limit number of games.

The above configuration makes it clear that when the specific number of games is 70% or more, the scene where the function of feature D7 is exhibited is when the upper limit number of games in an advantageous state is near.

Feature D9. an increase number grasping means for grasping the increase in the number of game media in a predetermined state among the advantageous states (a function for executing MY update processing by the main controller 101);
a second terminating means for terminating the advantageous state, regardless of whether or not the specific state is present, based on the increase number grasped by the increase number grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit increase number; (a function that performs a process for forced termination based on the fact that the number of increase/decrease sheets in an advantageous section has reached the upper limit in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
The specific setting means is configured to change the number of games to be shifted to the specific state from among the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means when the increase number grasped by the increase number grasping means is greater than or equal to a predetermined specific number. Regardless of the number of games played in a situation where the number of games is less than the specific number of games, the processing related to the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event can be set to be more disadvantageous to the player than in a situation where the number of games is less than the specific number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8.

According to the above configuration, if the increase in the number of game media in a predetermined state during an advantageous state is equal to or greater than a specific number, regardless of the number of games played in the situation after transitioning to the specific state, the advantageous state during the advantageous state is The temperature is set to be low. In other words, the increase in the number of game media in a given state during an advantageous state is a more advantageous condition in setting the advantage, and by doing this, the increase in the number of game media in a predetermined state during an advantageous state is increased. It is possible to set the level of advantage while not violating the significance of setting an upper limit increase in the number of game media in an advantageous state.

Feature D10. The gaming machine according to feature D9, wherein the specific number is set as an increase number that is 70% or more of the upper limit increase number.

The above configuration makes it clear that the specific number is 70% or more, and the scene where the function of feature D9 is exhibited is near the upper limit increase number in an advantageous state.

Feature D11. In a predetermined state among the advantageous states, an increase number grasping means (a function for executing MY update processing by the main controller 101) for grasping the increase in the number of gaming media is provided,
When the increase number ascertained by the increase number grasping means is a first specific number, the specific setting means sets a second specific number in which the increase number grasped by the increase number grasping means is smaller than the first specific number. Any one of the features D1 to D10 characterized in that it is possible to set the processing related to the advantageous determination of whether or not to cause the advantageous event to be more disadvantageous to the player than in the case where the advantageous event is caused. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the advantage level is set to be lower as the number of game media increases in a predetermined state among the advantageous states. In this way, by managing the level of advantage during an advantageous state not only by the number of games played after the transition to an advantageous state, but also by the actual increase in the number of gaming media, the wave of advantage during an advantageous state can be further reduced. This enables suitable management.

Feature D12. comprising an advantageous transition lottery means (a function for executing an advantageous section transition lottery process by the main controller 101) that performs a lottery for transition from the normal state to the advantageous state using the lottery result by the lottery means;
The advantageous transition lottery means executes the transition lottery for all lottery results except when the lottery result by the lottery means is a losing result, and performs the transition lottery so as to prevent non-winnings from the transition lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, which is characterized by executing a lottery.

In the above configuration, the transition to the advantageous state is 100% in all lottery results except for the losing results. In such a configuration, a transition to an advantageous state again occurs in many cases immediately after the end of an advantageous state, and as in feature D1, the ball payout rate that straddles the advantageous state is managed (wave setting). The significance of things is enhanced.

In addition, regarding the configuration that "the advantageous transition lottery means executes the transition lottery on all lottery results except when the lottery result by the lottery means is a losing result," , a high-probability result (for example, normal replay) and a low-probability result (missing or rare combination) are set so that the likelihood of occurrence is relatively high or low, and the advantageous transition lottery means is configured to at least select the lottery result. It may also be expressed as ``execute the transition lottery including the case where the lottery result by the means is the high probability result.''

In addition, regarding the structure that ``the transition lottery will be executed so that there will be no non-winners in the transition lottery'', it will be explained that ``the transition lottery will be executed so that the probability of winning in the transition lottery is equal to or higher than a specific probability''. It can also be expressed as "execute". In this case, the "specific probability" is preferably 80%, more preferably 90%, and even more preferably 100%.

Feature D13. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56, 57);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by operating in an operation mode is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, mode notification execution means (main) that can perform mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means. (a function of executing press order notification processing by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which it is possible to transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is executable, and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution unit is not executable. (normal section) and are set,
a game number grasping means (advantageous interval game number AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
Based on the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games, an ending means (main control (a function for performing forced termination processing in the second section display processing by the device 101);
a number of games setting means (a function for executing a ceiling game number setting process by the main controller 101) for setting the number of games to be played until the next transition to the specific state after the end of the predetermined specific state;
After the specific state ends, a post-end holding means capable of restricting the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined number of games (a function that executes a process of inputting 100 into an advantageous period continuation counter by the main controller 101) and,
Equipped with
When the number of games determined by the number of games determining means is a first number, the number of games setting means sets a second number such that the number of games determined by the number of games determining means is greater than the first number. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that it is easier to set a number of games smaller than the predetermined number of games as the number of games until the next specified state than in the case where the number of games is smaller than the predetermined number of games.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By making the player perform an operation, it is possible to give different benefits to the player, and a specific state in which mode notification is possible is set to be transitionable only during an advantageous state, and an upper limit on the number of games can be set for that advantageous state. In this way, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of an event in which the increase in the number of game media exceeds the range intended by the designer. In this case, after a specific state in an advantageous state, the advantageous state continues for a predetermined number of games, so even if the specific state is consecutively won within the predetermined number of games, the upper limit of the number of games in an advantageous state will be enforced. The game can be subject to termination, and the effectiveness of the upper limit on the number of games can be further increased.

In such a configuration, for a while after transitioning to an advantageous state, a so-called consecutive game in which the advantageous state does not end after a specific state and shifts to the next specific state is likely to occur. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage for a while after the transition to the advantageous state, and it is possible to suitably increase expectations for the transition to the advantageous state. Furthermore, the above configuration is such that as the number of games after shifting to an advantageous state increases, consecutive wins become less likely to occur. In other words, in the early stages when you are in an advantageous state, consecutive hits are more likely to occur, and in the final stages, it is less likely to occur. It is possible to intentionally set the wave of the ball payout rate. By doing so, it is possible to increase the gameplay by setting waves of high and low ball payout rates in advantageous states, while suppressing the overall ball payout rate from becoming too high in one advantageous state.

Moreover, by setting the wave of the ball payout rate in an advantageous state as in the above configuration, for example, even if advantageous conditions occur consecutively, a state with a high ball payout rate and a state with a low ball payout rate will continue. . In other words, the ball output rate at the end of the game when the player is in an advantageous position is low, and the rate at the beginning of the game when the player at the back is advantageous is high. Events in which high conditions occur continuously are avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the instantaneous ball payout rate from becoming too high across the advantageous state.

Note that each of the configurations limited by the features D1 to D12 may be applied individually to the feature D13, or may be applied in combination.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56, 57);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
Using the lottery result by the lottery means, the gaming state is shifted to a specific state (AT mode) in which a situation in which the payout of gaming media is likely to occur by the payout means continues until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied. A transition lottery means (a function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) that executes a transition lottery to determine whether or not the AT lottery is true;
If the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result that causes the gaming state to be transitioned to the specific state, a transition device (a function for executing processing corresponding to winning results by the main control device 101) that transitions the gaming state to the specific state;
the payout for the total number of bets set by the bet number setting means during the first specific number of games (for example, about 25 games in the first AT mode) required until the end condition of the specific state is met; by the lottery means in the specific state so that a specific percentage (ball payout rate), which is a percentage of the total number of payouts paid out by the device, may exceed a predetermined specific percentage (220%). The lottery probability and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means are determined,
At least the lottery means in the specific state determines that the specific percentage exceeds the specific percentage (220%) among the second specific number of games (400 games) that is greater than the first specific number of games. The game machine is equipped with a limiting means (a function of executing a process for adjusting the ball output by the main controller 101) that executes a limiting process that allows the lottery probability and the number of game media paid out by the payout means to be limited without changing them. A gaming machine with special features.

The specific ratio of the total number of payouts to the total number of bets is called the so-called payout rate, and the higher the payout rate, the faster the increase in gaming media, and while many users prefer this, However, if the payout rate is high and the speed at which gaming media increases is increased, the speed at which gaming media decreases during normal times when there is no increase in gaming media will also increase, which is not desirable for a gaming machine that will be accepted by many users. There is also an idea that. In this regard, in the above configuration, in a configuration in which the lottery result by the lottery means is used to shift to a specific state in which the payout of game media is likely to occur, the payout rate in the specific state may exceed the specific percentage. Although the lottery probability and the number of payouts during the specific state are determined, when looking at the number of games longer than the specific state (second specific number of games), a restriction that limits the payout rate from exceeding a specific percentage Because it is equipped with the means, it is possible to temporarily accelerate the speed of increase, but to suppress the speed of increase in the long term, making it possible to create a gaming machine that is acceptable to many users.

Moreover, in the above configuration, when looking at the number of games longer than the specific state, the configuration that prevents the ball payout rate from exceeding the specific percentage changes the lottery probability and the number of payouts for each game in the specific state. It is assumed that it will not be done. In this way, it is possible to avoid the situation where the result is not eligible for payout or the number of payouts is smaller than usual even though the state has transitioned to a specific state due to restriction by the restriction means. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from exceeding the specified percentage while not reducing the player's motivation to play.

Note that the "first specific number of games" may be limited to "the first specific number of games that is the number of multiple games" or "the first specific number of games that is 10 or more games", and by doing so, It is further clarified that the specific state in which the specific percentage is exceeded does not indicate a game that happens to have a lottery result with a large number of payouts.

Incidentally, the specific numerical value of the "specific percentage" is, for example, "220%" or "300%".

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the second specific number of games is set as a number of games that is 10 times or more the first specific number of games.

The above configuration defines the relationship between the number of games between situations in which the ball payout rate exceeds a specific percentage and situations in which it does not. From a long-term perspective, it will be clarified that the specific percentage will be limited so as not to exceed it. By clarifying in this way, it can be expected that the effect described in the above characteristic E1 can be more suitably achieved.

The specific numerical value of the "second specific number of games" is, for example, "400 games" or "500 games", and in this case, the "first specific number of games" is "40 games". Or it would be ``50 games.''

Feature E3. According to feature E1 or feature E2, the specific ratio between the second specific number of games can exceed the specific percentage if the limiting process by the limiting means is not performed. gaming machines.

By limiting as described above, the difference from a configuration in which the specific ratio between the second specific number of games is originally set so as not to exceed the specific ratio becomes clearer.

Feature E4. By performing the restriction process by the restriction means, the number of games between the specific state and the specific state increases without changing the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

Assuming that the lottery results of each game's lottery means are used to draw a lottery for transitioning to a specific state, if the winning probability of the lottery for transitioning to a specific state is changed through restriction processing by the restriction means, then , there may be a sense of incongruity in that the lottery result is one that would normally result in a winner, but the restriction process prevents the player from winning. On that point, in the above configuration, by increasing the number of games between specific states without changing the probability of winning the lottery for transition to a specific state, the above-mentioned sense of discomfort can be avoided. , it can be ensured that the specified percentage is not exceeded.

Feature E5. A game number setting means (a function of executing a ceiling counter setting process by the main control device 101) is provided for setting the number of transition games until transition to the next specific state after the specific state ends;
the transition means is configured to transition to the specific state regardless of the result of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means when the transition number of games is consumed without winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means after the specific state ends,
A gaming machine as described in feature E4, characterized in that when the limiting process is performed by the limiting means, the number of transfer games set by the game number setting means is greater than the number of games when the limiting process is not performed.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a so-called ceiling game number is set as the number of transition games before transitioning to the next specific state after a specific state ends, the number of ceiling games is increased by performing the restriction process. By making it so that (a deep ceiling is selected), the continuity of a specific state is restricted and the ball output rate does not exceed a specific percentage. In this way, it becomes possible to adjust the transition rate of a specific state and the successive winning rate, and adjust the ball payout rate, without changing the winning probability of the transition lottery that can be performed in each game.

Feature E6. the number of transition games for which the number of games among the number of transition games set by the number of games setting means is the largest between a case where the restriction process is performed by the restriction means and a case where the restriction process is not performed; The gaming machine according to feature E5, characterized in that the numbers of games are the same.

According to the above configuration, although the restriction process makes it easier to select the game with the largest number of transition games as the ceiling number of games, the one with the largest number of transition games out of the number of transition games is This is common regardless of the presence or absence of restriction processing. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming aware of the presence or absence of restriction processing.

Feature E7. After the specific state ends, if the predetermined number of specific games (100 games) is played without winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, then the number of games set by the number of games setting means This is a configuration in which the number of transition games is reset,
The gaming machine according to feature E5 or feature E6, wherein when the limiting process is performed by the limiting means, the number of transition games is more likely to be set by the number of games setting means to be equal to or greater than the specific number of games. .

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the number of ceiling games is reset when a specific number of games are exhausted after a specific state, when the restriction process is performed, the number of ceiling games is likely to exceed the specific number of games, and the number of ceiling games is It becomes easier to reset the number of games. In other words, by overturning the assumption that a certain state will always be reached by playing the ceiling number of games after a certain state, discontinuity of a certain state can be realized, and the phenomenon where the ball payout rate exceeds a certain percentage can be prevented. It is possible to avoid this.

Feature E8. Based on the fact that the transition lottery has been won by the transition lottery means, a winning notification means (such as an AT mode winning notification effect by the display control device 81) that can notify the winning of the transition lottery by using a predetermined notification means. functions),
The transition means is configured to transition to the specific state after winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means and after the win notification is performed by the win notification means,
A number of notification games setting means (a function of executing processing for setting the number of portent games by the main control device 101) for setting the number of notification games until the winning notification is performed after winning the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means. ,
When the restriction processing is performed by the restriction means, the number of notification games set by the notification game number setting means is configured to be larger than the number of games when the restriction processing is not performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E7.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the transition to the specific state does not occur until the winning notification is performed after winning the transition lottery, the number of notification games (number of portent games) until the winning notification is performed is adjusted. This makes it possible to adjust the continuity of a specific state. In particular, since it only adjusts the number of games to be notified after the transition lottery has been won and before the winning announcement is made, it is essentially adjusting the number of games in a situation where the transition lottery is not held. , it is possible to realize discontinuity of a specific state without affecting the winning probability of the transition lottery.

Feature E9. Any one of features E1 to E8, wherein the limiting means is capable of preventing the specific ratio from exceeding the specific percentage by changing the termination condition in the specific state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, by changing the ending condition in the specific state, a difference may occur in the number of payouts of game media and the number of consecutive games (first specific number of games) in the specific state itself, and as a result, the It becomes possible to prevent the ball rate from exceeding a specific percentage.

In addition, in the above configuration, "the limiting means changes the first specific number of games until the end condition is met in the specific state so that the specific percentage does not exceed the specific percentage. It may be expressed as "it is possible to do so."

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A through Feature Group E described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A through E individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern sequence, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operating means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... Reel as a rotating body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker forming an auxiliary performance section, 65 ... Auxiliary display part constituting an auxiliary production part, 68... Instruction monitor, N8... Eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... Display control device as a sub control board, 101... Main control device as a main control board , 102... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (1)

a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
an accepting means for accepting gaming media or virtual gaming media;
a bet number setting means for setting a bet number for a game;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a granting means capable of granting a predetermined number of gaming media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize can be won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and a first result in which the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. a second result that makes it possible to win a prize;
comprising mode notification execution means capable of executing mode notification regarding operation modes including the first operation mode and the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means;
A special state is set that allows transition to a specific state in which the mode notification can be executed by the mode notification execution means,
In the special state, comprising means capable of making a specific determination of transitioning to the specific state,
The states in the special state include a first state in which the result of the specific determination is likely to result in a transition to the specific state, and a state in which the result of the specific determination is more likely to result in a transition to the specific state than the first state. a second state that is unlikely to result in the transition;
a first means capable of terminating the specific state and the special state when a first terminating condition is met;
a second means capable of terminating the specific state while preventing the special state from terminating when a second terminating condition is met;
means that can be set as the first state in the next special state when the specific state is terminated by the first means;
means capable of setting a state after the specific state as the second state when the specific state is terminated by the second means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the special state is not ended in the first state .

Images